JP6516779B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, there have been gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines that have two operation means such as effect buttons that can be operated by a player. In this gaming machine, an operation promotion display for urging the player to operate the one operation means is executed. When the operation prompting display is executed, even if the player operates the other operation means, the operation of the other operation means is determined to be valid, and one of the one is operated according to the operation of the other operation means. The same effect as the effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means is performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-5651, A

  According to the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the same effect is executed regardless of which operation means is operated, regardless of the mode of the operation promotion display. Therefore, the operation in which the player is prompted to operate by the operation promotion display In some cases, the operating means different from the means may be operated. For this reason, it is not possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation of the operation means whose operation is prompted by the operation promotion display.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by operation.

(1-1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
First detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, push button 120, trigger button 121, stick controller 122, handle button, cross key for setting, decision key for setting);
Before Stories second detecting means capable of detecting the operation of the different player of the operation of the first detecting means detectable player (e.g., an operation portion other than the push button 120 the first detecting means if the push button 120 )When,
The first mode (for example, a mode in which a button does not pop out as shown in FIG. 38B or the like) or a second mode (for example, the first mode) The promotion display means (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control, the effect display device 9, etc.) which can be displayed in the mode which urges the player to operate more strongly than the mode, the mode in which the button as shown in FIG. Step S8125 of FIG. 34, Step S8139A of FIG. 35, and
An effect executing means (for example, an execution executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect when the first detecting means or the second detecting means detects the action of the player based on the promotion displaying means executing the promotion displaying means) And an effect display device 9).
The effect executing means is
When the promotion display of the first detection means is the first mode, it is determined that the action of the player is detected by the second detection means with respect to the first mode (see, for example, FIG. 31). (B), as shown in step S8128 of FIG. 34, and FIG. 38F, the effects of the same effect mode as the first effect mode and the second effect mode of the button serif notification effect image may be executed, or the same The same kind of presentation mode such as an effect that is a character but that has different movement, an effect that indicates that the character is talking serifs of the same meaning, an effect that has the same degree of expectation such as 50% or more of big hit expectation The effect may be performed, or a related effect such as executing a premium effect for one operation and performing an associated non-premium effect for the other operation may be performed. . ,
When the promotion display of the first detection means is the second mode, it is not determined that the action of the player is detected by the second detection means for the second mode as an effective determination (for example, the second detection With respect to the operation of the means, the same effect as the effect for the operation of the first detection means may not be performed, or any effect may not be performed, and step S8149 in FIG. An effect of notifying that the operation is invalid may be executed as shown in D)),
It further comprises a change effect executing means (for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the promotion image 373 to a different size) for executing a change effect for changing the display mode of the promotion display,
The change presentation execution means can change the promotion display to a display mode according to a period in which the operation is continuously detected by at least one of the first detection means and the second detection means,
The promotion display means executes the promotion display so that a rate at which an advantageous state for the player is controlled when executed is higher in the second mode than in the first mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by the operation.
Moreover, the said promotion display may be in the visual recognition difficult state in which at least one part is concealed by the movable member effect in which a movable member operate | moves,
The display period of the prompting display ends later than the period in which the prompting display is in the difficult-to-view state.

  In addition, the "operation promotion display" described in the means (1-1) may be called "promotion image" or "operation promotion image" in this specification. Moreover, "operation" to the operation means described in the means (1-1) may be referred to as "action" in this specification.

(1-2) In the gaming machine of (1-1) above,
The operation promotion display means executes the operation promotion display so that the proportion controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when executed is higher in the second mode than in the first mode ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 31 (B) and 31 (C), the mode of the operation promoting display of the button cut-in notice effect is executed rather than when the mode of the operation promoting display of the button serif preview effect is performed. The rate at which the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher.

  According to such a configuration, the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the operation prompting display of the second aspect is executed than in the first aspect. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation promotion display, and the operation according to the operation promotion display can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation.

(1-3) In the gaming machine of (1-1) or (1-2) above,
The first operation means can be changed from the normal mode to the specific mode (for example, the shape, the pattern, the color, or the like can be changed such that the push button 120 pops out),
When the first operation means is in the specific mode, the effect execution means does not determine the operation of the second operation means as an effective determination (for example, for the operation of the second operation means, the operation of the second operation means The same effect as the effect for the operation may not be performed, or any effect may not be performed, and the operation is invalid as shown in step S8149 of FIG. 35 and FIG. 39 (D). You may perform the production | presentation which notifies that.).

  According to such a configuration, when the first operation means is in the specific mode, the same effect as the effect for the operation of the first operation means is not executed even when the second operation means is operated. Therefore, the operation of the first operation means can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation.

(1-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1) to (1-3) above,
An instruction display means capable of displaying an explanation to the effect that the operation of the second operation means is determined to be effective when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in step S8125, FIG. 38 (B) and the like, it is displayed that the operation of the other operation unit is effective.

  According to such a configuration, the player is easily informed that the determination is made effective even when the second operation means is operated when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from wondering which operation means to operate.

(1-5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1) to (1-4) above,
The information processing apparatus further includes indication display means capable of displaying an indication that the operation of the second operation means is not regarded as effective determination when the operation promotion display of the first operation means is the second mode (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in step S8139A and FIG. 39 (B), it displays that the operation of the other operation unit is invalid.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player that when the second operation means is operated when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, it is not determined as an effective determination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the second operating means in anticipation that the same effect as when the first operating means is operated is performed without the player being aware.

(1-6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1) to (1-5) above,
Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, a push button 120, a stick controller 122, a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor, etc.);
A movable member (for example, a gift 200) which performs a predetermined operation;
Detection valid period display means for displaying a detection valid period display (for example, a remaining valid period image (remaining valid period image 202 shown in FIG. 38B)) indicating that the detection by the detection means is a valid detection valid period (For example, the effect control microcomputer 100, steps S8126, S8140, S8168)
The detection valid period display is a invisible condition in which at least a portion is concealed by the operation of the movable member (for example, a state in which the remaining valid period image 202 shown in FIG. May be))
The detection valid period ends later than the period in which the detection valid period display is in the difficult-to-see state (for example, as shown in FIG. 30B), after the character returns from the rendering position to the initial position, That is, the detection valid period ends after the visual difficulty state of the remaining valid period image is eliminated).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the movable member operable and to prevent the player from overlooking the detection effective period.

(1-7) In the gaming machine of (1-6) above,
The gaming machine is a gaming machine that performs variable display,
The effect executing means is
While the variable display can be performed production,
Detection effect executing means (for example, micro for effect control) which executes detection effect (for example, button speech notification effect, button cut in notification effect, lever notification effect) based on detection of the player's action by the detection means Computer 100, steps S8120 to S8175),
Movable member effect executing means (for example, microcomputer 100 for effect control, steps S8106 to S8114) for executing movable member effect (for example, character announcement effect effect) for operating the movable member;
The detection effect and the movable member effect can be performed at the same time in a period before the variable display reaches the reach state (for example, as shown in FIG. 30A, in the period before the reach state) , Button serif announcement production and feature announcement announcement production can be performed at the same time).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to important effects, and it is possible to effectively perform effects.

(1-8) In the gaming machine of (1-6) above,
The detection effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of detection effects (for example, button speech notification effect, button cut in notification effect, lever notification effect) having different degrees of expectation.
The effect execution means does not simultaneously execute the detection effect and the movable member effect of which the expectation is higher than the predetermined degree (for example, a button cut-in notification effect whose expectation (importance) is higher than that of the button speech notification effect and The lever preview effect and the feature preview effect are not performed at the same time (see FIG. 30).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect with high expectation from being overlooked.

(1-9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-6) to (1-8),
A plurality of detection means (for example, a push button 120, a stick controller 122, a non-contact type sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor, etc.) capable of detecting different player's actions,
The said detection effect execution means is based on the fact that a specific detection means (for example, the stick controller 122) of the plurality of detection means has detected the action of the player, a specific detection effect (for example, a lever advance notice effect) Is viable and
The effect execution means does not execute the specific detection effect and the movable member effect at the same time (for example, the lever advance effect and the feature advance effect are not performed at the same time. See FIG. 30).

  According to such a configuration, by providing the specific detection effect that is not executed simultaneously with the movable member effect, the effect can be made easy to understand.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following means (2-1)-(2-8) is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. The conventional gaming machine is provided with detection means (for example, a push button sensor, a stick controller tilt sensor, a trigger button sensor) capable of detecting the action of the player, and based on detection of the action of the player during the effective period. There are some that perform a specific effect. In such a case, there has been a case where a promotion image for promoting the player to perform an operation is displayed (see, for example, JP-A-2015-93049).

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, the promotion image is always monotonous with a constant display, and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, the configuration is as follows.

(2-1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, a push sensor 124 capable of detecting a pressing operation on the push button 120. something capable of detecting an operation on another operation member (for example, a pressing operation on the trigger button 121) The trigger sensor 125 can detect the tilt, the tilt direction sensor unit 123 can detect the tilt operation to the stick controller 122, or a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or a motion sensor. Good) and
Promotion image display means (for example, display of promotion image 373) for displaying a promotion image for urging the player to perform an operation;
A change effect executing unit (for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the promotion image 373 to a different size) for executing a change effect for changing the display mode of the promotion image;
The change effect execution means changes the display mode of the promotion image when the player's operation is continuously detected, and the promotion image to the display mode according to the period in which the player's operation is continuously detected It is characterized in that it is possible to change

  According to such a configuration, since the promotion image changes to the display mode according to the period in which the operation is continuously detected, the interest can be improved.

(2-2) A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, a push sensor 124 capable of detecting a pressing operation on the push button 120. something capable of detecting an operation on another operation member (for example, a pressing operation on the trigger button 121) The trigger sensor 125 can detect the tilt, the tilt direction sensor unit 123 can detect the tilt operation to the stick controller 122, or a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or a motion sensor. Good) and
Indication indication (for example, indication of the first effective period gauge) suggesting the effective period (for example, the first effective period) of the operation is performed, and the display mode of the indication is changed toward the predetermined aspect (for example, the end aspect) Suggestion display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S2610 and S3307 in the effect control microcomputer 100);
Before the display mode of the suggestion display changes to the predetermined mode, a predetermined condition based on the detection of the operation (for example, detecting 10 operations on the push button 120. If the state changes based on the detection of the operation) For example, a specific effect (for example, a first specific effect) is executed when a meter, a numerical value, a display effect (effect of defeating an enemy character), or lighting of a lamp may be in a predetermined state. Possible specific effect executing means (for example, a portion of the microcomputer for effect control 100 which executes step S2622);
When the predetermined condition is not established, the suggestion display execution means can stop the change of the indication mode of the suggestion display before the indication mode of the suggestion display changes to the predetermined mode (for example, for effect control) The microcomputer 100 is capable of avoiding the execution of step S2610 and stopping the change of the first effective period gauge by performing Y to S2608 of step S2606 or steps S2612 to S2615). Do.

  According to such a configuration, when the change of the indication of the indication is stopped, the actual effective period may be longer than the appearance of the indication of the indication, and the interest can be improved.

(2-3) In the gaming machine of (2-1) above,
The specific effect execution means detects that the operation is continuously detected by the detection means (for example, detecting 10 operations (continuous hitting) on the push button 120. Continuous operation for a predetermined time or more (so-called, long press) If the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific effect is executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the number of times P is “10” in step S2620). Step S2622 can only be performed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it appear that the effective period of the continuous operation is extended, and the interest can be improved.

(2-4) In the gaming machine of (2-1) or (2-2) above,
Effect display (for example, micro for effect control) which performs effect display (for example, display of the first number gauge) and gradually changes the display mode of the effect display based on the detection of the operation by the detection means A portion of the computer 100 that executes step S2619),
The suggestion display execution means stores the display mode of the effect display by the effect display execution means at a specific stage (for example, the first area stored when the first operation on the push button 120 is detected during the first effective period) It is possible to stop the change of the display mode of the suggestion display (for example, effect) when it is changed up to the stage where the second area and subsequent predetermined areas are stored. The control microcomputer 100 can avoid step S2610 only in the case of Y in step S2606).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately stop the change in the indication of suggestion.
(2-5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1) to (2-3) above,
Informing effect execution means (for example, in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) which can execute informing effect (for example, displaying “continuous hitting plus”) informing that change of the display mode of the suggestion display is stopped is executed step S2608 Part)).

  According to such a configuration, it can be prevented that the stop of the change in the indication of suggestion is misunderstood as a failure.

(2-6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1) to (2-4) above,
The suggestion display execution means is a second suggestion display in which the first suggestion indication (for example, patterns A2 and A4) in which the actual validity period and the suggestion effective period coincide with each other does not match the actual validity period and the suggestion effective period (For example, it is possible to perform the patterns A1 and A3) (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the step S3911 to select the first operation effect pattern, and the step S3304 performs the first operation effect pattern. The first effective period according to the operation effect pattern is set).

  According to such a configuration, even in the first suggestion display, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the stop of the change in the display mode of the suggestion display.

(2-7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1) to (2-5) above,
A first promotion notification (for example, an operation promotion display for the push button 120) for prompting a player's first operation (for example, an operation for the push button 120) and a second operation for the player (for example, an operation for the stick controller 122) Promotion notification means (for example, in the effect control CPU 101) that performs the second promotion notification (for example, the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122 etc.) for prompting the operation promotion determined in step S293A by executing step S8105 Part to execute the display),
Before the first promotion notification and the second promotion notification, a plurality of forms of pre-promotion notification (for example, various operation pre-promotion displays such as common effects, 2 button effects, 4 button effects, and 4V control effects shown in FIG. 81) Etc.) (e.g., a portion of the effect control CPU 101 that executes the operation promotion display determined in step S293B by executing step S8105). ,
The detection means can detect the first operation and the second operation (for example, the tilt direction sensor unit 123 and the push sensor 124 can detect the operation of the push button 120 and the operation of the stick controller 122),
Cut-in effect determination processing by executing step S8105 in the effect control unit (for example, the effect control CPU 101) capable of executing predetermined effects (for example, cut-in effects A to C, etc.) based on the detection result of the detection means Further includes a portion for performing the cut-in effect determined in
Pre-promotion notification mode (for example, common effect, 2 button effect, 4 button effect, or 4V control effect before display) and type of first promotion notification and second promotion notification (for example, For example, depending on which operation promotion display is performed by the push button 120 or the stick controller 122, etc., the ratio at which an effect (for example, cut-in effect C, etc.) that is advantageous for the player is notified varies as a predetermined effect. .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
(2-8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1) to (2-6) above,
The display device further comprises promotion display means (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S2611 and S3307) for performing a promotion display to urge the player's action;
The promotion display means is a display mode of the promotion display (for example, the first display mode, the first display mode, the first display mode, the first display mode, or the (2) display mode (may be changed to three or more display modes) (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the first effective period indicated by the first effective period gauge in step S2611) By performing the first operation prompting display according to the remaining time, the display mode of the first operation prompting display is changed according to the elapsed first valid period).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by performing rendering that is not monotonous.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine in 1st Embodiment from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. FIG. 6 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the configuration of a pending specific area and a pending storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop symbol and a temporary stop symbol of a production symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution timing of a character thing notice production, a button serif notice production, a button cut in notice production, and a lever notice production. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing an example of an execution determination table of a bonus announcement presentation effect, a button speech announcement presentation effect, a button cut-in announcement presentation effect, and a lever announcement presentation effect. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a character thing preliminary | backup production | presentation, and button serif preliminary production | generation. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of button cut-in notice effect. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine in 2nd Embodiment from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a big hit classification determination table. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of a presentation control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of a presentation control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st operation reception process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st operation reception process. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd operation reception processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd operation reception processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the production | presentation symbol in a presentation display apparatus. (A) is an explanatory view showing a first operation effect pattern lottery table, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a second operation effect pattern lottery table. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of a process table. It is a flow chart which shows processing during the production design fluctuation in the production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows the production design fluctuation stop processing in the production control process processing. It is an explanatory view showing the example of a display in the 1st operation production. It is an explanatory view showing the example of a display in the 2nd operation production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a button etc. operation production determination process in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number in a modification. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the table for operation promotion display determination in a modification, (B) and (C) are figures which show an example of the table for display determination before operation promotion in the case of a push button and a stick controller. It is. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for cut-in presentation determination in a modification.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment as viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 122 capable of holding and tilting in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), and performs predetermined operations by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) which can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling the trigger button 121 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 122 or the like. Also, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing the predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like.

  In addition, the push button 120 incorporates a button jumping actuator 128 (see FIG. 3) for jumping the push button 120. A mode in which the push button 120 is deformed or popped out from the normal mode by about several centimeters in the direction opposite to the pressing direction by the button jumping actuator 128 (see FIG. 39B) And so on. The button pop-out actuator 128 may be anything as long as the aspect of the push button 120 can be changed. For example, it may be a motor such as a servomotor or a solenoid. It may be a power cylinder such as a pneumatic cylinder or an electric cylinder.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided which display a fourth symbol following the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (but, correctly, the variation display of the presentation symbol changes on the microcomputer 100 side for presentation control) It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the rendering using the rendering display 9, for example, the content of the rendering including the fluctuation display of the rendering pattern disappears from the screen for a moment Effects are being diversified, such as effects being performed, and effects such as moving objects blocking all or part of the screen being performed. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the state is currently in the state of fluctuating display. So, in this embodiment, by performing the variation display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, is the state of the present variation display now by confirming the state of the fourth symbol? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. In addition, since the 4th design is always changed and displayed in a fixed operation, and it does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, it can always be viewed.

  In addition, when the gaming machine is configured to provide the movable member in the game area, the fourth symbol is displayed in the area where the visual recognition is not hindered even if the movable member is at any position in the game area. It should be configured to

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be generically referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, the display color that reminds of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the off. For example, the off) Sometimes it is displayed in blue while in the case of a big hit it is displayed in red.

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area is provided in part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, but separately from the effect display device 9, a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which two LEDs are alternately lit, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be displayed whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

  On the right of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). The second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol is also similar to the first.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable indicator) There is something to do.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  In the center of the upper part of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6, a star shape configured to be movable downward (on the screen of the effect display device 9, that is, in front of the screen of the effect display device 9 as viewed from the player) The character 200 is provided. This accessory 200 takes the center of the upper part of the effect display device 9 as the initial position (see FIG. 38A), and can move to the effect position overlapping a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (FIG. See D). The accessory 200 may be provided with a light emitter such as an LED.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In addition, above the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b, the same as the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b, the first hold storage number (hold storage is also referred to as start storage or start winning storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a for displaying the symbol is provided.

  In addition, an area (total holding storage display unit) 18c displaying the total number (total holding storage number) which is the total of the first holding storage number and the second holding storage number in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9c. Is provided. In this embodiment, by providing the combined hold storage display unit 18c that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. . Note that instead of the total pending storage number display unit 18c, a first pending storage display unit for displaying the first pending storage number and a second pending storage display unit for displaying the second pending storage number are provided. May be

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a hit symbol, for example, a symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the variation display of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits and the symbol is increased is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. In addition, even in the short time state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), which is not a definite change state but the symbol variation time is shortened, the opening time and the opening number of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value. The same applies to the second.

  In this embodiment, the game state is shifted to a high probability state (probable change state) when becoming a probability change big hit, and the game ball becomes easy to get started (that is, the special symbol display 8a, 8b or the effect) A transition is made to a high base state which is a gaming state controlled such that execution conditions of variable display in the display device 9 are easily established) (in this embodiment, transition to a time saving state). Also, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, it shifts to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a time reduction state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, so the variation of the special symbol and the representation symbol starts It is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence (in other words, the quickening of the reserve memory) and the occurrence of an invalid start winning. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, part or all of which is created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as a backup power source discharges and the backup power source can not supply power). Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as a special symbol process flag or a probability change flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 503 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for giving detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the main circuit board is also a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output of

  In the effect control means, as described later, the push sensor 124 provided in the stick controller 122, the tilt direction sensor unit 123, the vibrator motor 126, the button jumping actuator 128, and the push sensor 120 are provided. Are also connected (see FIG. 3), but are not shown in FIG.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 operates the accessory 200 by outputting a drive signal to the accessory motor 127 via the output port 105.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 outputs the drive signal to the button jumping actuator 128 via the output port 105, thereby changing the push button 120 from the normal mode or jumping out. And return to the normal mode.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined effect period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect symbol).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is inputted becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply (steps S41 to S43). Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). In addition, the CPU 56 transmits to the effect control board 80 a display result designating command designating the display result (usually a big hit, a positive change big hit, a sudden positive change big hit, a small hit, or a drop) stored in the backup RAM S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for performing selective processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determining a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). ) Is sent to the sub-substrate (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of random R, for example, by executing processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round (take the random number for determination per normal pattern) When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Subsequently, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states of them are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, drive signals are output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro-circuit mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to on / off of solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 changes the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined rendering symbols that do not reach will be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") when the variable display result is a lost design.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach") when the variable display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Finally, in the "left", "middle" and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped (in the case of sudden definite variation big hit) There is also a case where a sudden change big hit symbol (for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed without reaching.

  When "5" which is a small hit is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect design in the effect display device 9 is "suddenly, certain variation big hit" In the same manner as in the above case, after the variable display of the rendering symbol is performed, a predetermined small hitting symbol (suddenly the same symbol as the probability changing big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a "small hit" variable display mode .

  Here, the small hit is a hit where the gaming state does not change when the small hit game is over. That is, there is no transition from the positive change state to the normal state or from the normal state to the positive change state. In addition, the sudden change big hit is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is small in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening of the 0.1 second twice), or the opening time of the big winning opening Is a very short jackpot, and a jackpot to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to a definite change state (ie, by doing so, as if it had suddenly become a definite change state to the player It is something to show). That is, in this embodiment, the small hit is the same as the open pattern of the big hit and the big winning opening suddenly. By controlling in this way, when the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit suddenly. (Perspective change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA 1-1-1-1 as non-reach PA-1 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off” and the variable display mode of the rendering symbol is “non-reach”. The fluctuation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect pattern is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 The variation patterns of Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-2 and Super PB 3-1 to Super PB 3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 which is used when non-reaching and is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream. In the case of using the normal PB2-1 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and which are accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-2 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is to execute the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol, normal PA 2-3 to normal PA 2-4, normal PB 2-3 to normal The variation patterns of PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, super PB3-3 to super PB3-4, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are prepared. There is. In FIG. 6, the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-3 and the variation pattern of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability variation hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns which are used when there is not a sudden positive big hit and which is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, in the case of using the normal PB2-3, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-4 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 which is used in the case of a sudden definite big hit and which is accompanied by a pseudo rendition.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo link, the fluctuation time is 32). Fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo run, the variation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds), but even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, for example The fluctuation time may be varied according to the total number of pending storages. For example, even with the same type of super reach, as the total number of pending storages increases, the variation time may be shortened. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, in the case of performing variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the first number of pending storage, (2) In the case of performing variable display of a special symbol, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of pending storages. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3, 4 It is also possible to prepare a variation pattern type determination table for use), select the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number, and make the variation time different.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot described later, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR 2): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the random 4 initial value)
In this embodiment, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and determines the variation using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) It is determined to be one of the variation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the features of the variation modes.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating a jackpot type determination random number of (1) and a random number per normal symbol determination of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5).

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a short time state (that is, a gaming state that is not a definite change state), and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 8A in the positive change time jackpot determination table Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 8C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the big hit judgment values are matched, it is decided to make it a big hit (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. If the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 8E shows the case where the jackpot type is determined by using the retention memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the big hit classification determination table 131a, 131b is to make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "normal big hit", based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, " It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either “probability big hit” or “suddenly big hit”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as the big hit types. In this embodiment, although the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to For example, a 10R probability variation big hit to control 10 rounds of big hit games, a 7R probability variation big hit to control 7 rounds of big hit games, a 5R probability variation big hit to control 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, there are three cases of the big hit type being “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit”, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more types. A jackpot type may be provided. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit state of 15 rounds and is shifted to a time saving state only after the end of the big hit state (see step S 167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time saving state is finished (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). In addition, even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  "Perhaps a big hit" is a big hit that controls to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a positive changing state after the big hit playing state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a positive changing state and also to a time saving state (Refer to steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  In addition, "suddenly positive variation big hit" is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is smaller than "normal big hit" or "positive variation big hit" (in this embodiment, 2 times opening for 0.1 seconds) It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. Also, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in "normal big hit" and "probably big hit", while the opening time of big winning opening per round is "in sudden definite changing big hit" It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. And in this embodiment, it is transitioned to a definite change state after the termination of that sudden change big hit game state (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a definite change state and also to a short time state. Step S169, which will be described later) See S170). Then, the positive change state and the short time state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of a "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit gaming state by "a sudden definite big hit" Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and the judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" (big hit type judgment value ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol that is variably displayed on the staging display device 9 corresponding to ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration display.

  The commands A 001 and A 002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, the start of the big hit game. In this embodiment, depending on the type of big hit, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command is used. Specifically, the jackpot start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit", and the small hit in the case of "suddenly big hit" or "small hit" The sudden definite big hit start specification command (A 002 (H)) is used.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set to the EXT data and transmitted for the special winning opening open designation command, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted after the special winning opening open command, a different special winning opening after opening specification command is transmitted every round. For example, when the first round in the big hit game is ended, the designated special command (A 201 (H)) is sent after the opening of the big winning opening which designates the round 1, and the tenth round in the big hit game is ended. Is sent after the special winning opening opening specifying the round 10, a specification command (A30A (H)).

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending a big hit game by “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”. The command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 2 specified command) for specifying the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (probable variation state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the definite variation state. The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) for specifying a background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize designation command) for designating that there has been a first start prize. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start prize designation command) for designating that there has been a second start prize. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first starting winning a prize designation command and the second starting winning a prize designation command may be generically referred to as a starting winning a prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for specifying a total number (total pending storage number) which is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total number of pending storages. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (sum total storage number subtraction designation command) for designating 1 subtraction of the total number of suspension storage numbers.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the display state of the lamp is changed, Do.

  For example, microcomputer 560 for game control designates the fluctuation pattern of the production design every time there is a starting winning and variable display of special symbols is started in first special symbol display 8a or second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31 via the relay substrate 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8a in response to the variation of the first special symbol. It can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the production symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the symbol display 8b, and the production display which performs the production with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the rendering components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the rendering control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIGS. 11 and 12 are flow charts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. FIG. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, if the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won in the first start winning opening 13 is on in the special symbol process processing, that is, the start to the first start winning opening 13 If the winning is occurring, the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (steps S311 and S312). In addition, when the second starting opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening 14 is on, that is, the starting winning for the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.
Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the hold memory buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. Data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 22), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control which transmits the special winning a prize opening opening designated command to the micro-computer 100 for production control, the execution time of the special winning a prize opening opening processing is set with the timer, internal state (special symbol process flag) step S306 Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed every round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also the processing to start the big hit game. Further, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data, the different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted every round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening open processing, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, while performing control which transmits the specified command after the opening in the big hit to the microcomputer 100 for production control, when all rounds are finished, internal state (special symbol process flag) the value which corresponds to step S307 (this value In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game, but when starting the first open in the small hit game, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit It is also a process to start.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. In addition, when all opening is finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch passage process of step S312. FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage process of step S314.

  First, the first starting opening switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (A). In the first starting opening switch passage process executed when the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, 1) Check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter for counting the number of pending storages is 4) (step S1211A). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the combined hold storage number counter in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1214A).

  In this embodiment, when the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the first starting winning opening 13), data indicating "first" is set, When the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the second starting winning opening 14), data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first starting port switch 13 a is turned on in the storage-preferring specific information storage area (pending specific area). When the 2 start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating the "second". In this case, when there is no corresponding pending storage, 00 (H) is set in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area).

  FIG. 14A is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of the suspension storage specification information storage area (storage suspension area). As shown in FIG. 14 (A), in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total hold memory number counter is secured. Note that FIG. 14A shows an example in which the value of the combined pending storage number counter is five. As shown in FIG. 14A, in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total hold memory number counter is secured, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first start winning opening 13 or 2) Based on the winning on the start winning opening 14, data indicating that it is "first" or "second" is set in the winning order. Therefore, the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 is stored in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area). The hold specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 14B) (see FIG. Step S1215A). In the process of step S1215A, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) in the 1st starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 14B is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of an area (pending storage buffer) for saving a random number and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 14B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1216A), and sets the value of the total hold memory number counter to the EXT data to specify the total hold memory number specification command Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1217A).

  The second start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 13B is similar to the first start port switch passing process of FIG. 13A, and therefore the description will not be repeated.

  FIG.15 and FIG.16 is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in a special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, the CPU 56 determines whether or not a predetermined period (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the fluctuation display was finally stopped if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been sent yet. It confirms (step S51A). In addition, whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the last stop of the fluctuation display, for example, when the fluctuation display is ended (for example, in a special symbol stop process described later), a predetermined timer is set, and in step S51A This can be determined by confirming whether or not this predetermined timer has timed out. Finally, if the predetermined period has elapsed since the fluctuation display was stopped, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a customer waiting demo specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51B), and ends the processing. . For example, when transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command in step S51B, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, step S51A is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag is set. , S51B may be controlled not to be executed. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 14A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). If the first data set in the hold specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 selects the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "second" is set to a flag indicating whether the special symbol process process is being performed for the special symbol or the second special symbol is performed (step S53). If the first data set in the hold specific area is data indicating "first" (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  In this embodiment, the process of steps S52 to S54 is executed, and in this embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol according to the starting winning order in which the gaming balls have won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in accordance with the start winning combination in which the game balls have won in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Although the case where it is shown is shown, you may constitute so that priority may be given to change display of either one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. In this case, for example, when shifting to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second start winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15, and the second hold storage tends to be accumulated. The variation display of the special symbol may be executed with priority.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and in the pending specific area and the first pending storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective saving areas in the pending specific area and the second pending storage buffer are shifted. Do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. The second is the same as the first. In addition, the CPU 56 sums up the values (the value indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the suspension specific area. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1 to 8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. Also, the CPU 56 sets only the time-shortening flag indicating that the time-shortening state is set, and performs control to transmit a time-shortening state background designation command when the probability change flag is not set. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if neither the positive variation flag nor the short time flag is set.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when starting to change the special symbol, micro control for effect control in the order of background specification command, fluctuation pattern command, display result specification command, total suspension storage number subtraction specification command for each timer interrupt It will be sent to the computer 100. Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, A total pending storage number subtraction specification command is sent. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for the jackpot determination extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passing process and step S1215B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) with the jackpot judgment random number, and executes processing for deciding to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is a non-deterministic change state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When it is in the state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at the normal time. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. And, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. In addition, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not the small hit is made using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 8C. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (D). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“normal big hit”, “probable variation”) corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A "big hit" or "a sudden definite big hit" is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type which is extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passing process and step S1215B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer. Read the random number and decide the big hit type. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the determination result of the big hit type, it decides the stop design of the special symbol “1”, “3”, “7” which becomes the big hit symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "big hit" is determined, the "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot fluctuation pattern type judgment table according to the jackpot type as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. (Step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S94). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether the time short flag indicating the short time state is set (step S95). Note that the time saving flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to a definite changing state or a time saving state, and is reset when the time saving state is ended. Specifically, when it is determined to be "normally a big hit", the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. In addition, after the big hit game end, it is reset when the fluctuation indication of specified number of times (100 times with this execution form) ends. The time saving flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs even before the predetermined number of times of variation display ends. In addition, when it is determined to be "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit", the probability flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the processing for ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability change flag.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination for normal time as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. A table is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type for determining the variation pattern type as any one of a plurality of types, and the variation pattern for loss at the time of shortening The type determination table is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state (in this embodiment, the time change state is always made when transitioning to the positive change state) Are also transferred (see steps S169 and S170), and if it is determined as Y in step S95, the CPU 56 may change the type of variation pattern type if there is a probability change state or if it is controlled to only the time saving state). As a table used to determine any one of a plurality of types, the time-outout variation pattern type determination table is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is normal and the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S95 to S99, the variation pattern type determination table for losing upon reduction Is selected. In addition, when the game state is a definite change state or a short time state, a time variation check pattern selection table for off time is selected. In this case, the variation pattern type for shortening variation may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100 described later, and if the variation pattern type for shortening variation is determined, the variation is performed in step S102. As a pattern, non-reach PA-1 and shortening fluctuation are determined (see FIG. 6). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, it is shown that the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state or the time saving state is different from the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories. However, a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. The variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100. A pattern determination table is selected (step S101). Also, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserve storage buffer or the second reserve storage buffer), the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command (see FIG. 9) according to any one of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit and removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set, if the type of the jackpot is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not whether it is "a certainty big hit" or not. . Then, when it is neither “normal big hit” nor “probable big hit” (ie, when it is “suddenly big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designated command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when the small hit flag is off, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the combined holding memory number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Note that whether or not the total storage reserve number subtraction specification command has already been transmitted, for example, that the total storage retention number subtraction specification command has been sent when transmitting the total storage storage number subtraction specification command in step S1122 described later. The sum holding storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the sum holding storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set may be checked in step S1121. Also, in this case, the set combined holding memory number subtraction designated command transmitted flag is reset in the special symbol stop processing and the big hit end processing described later when the variation display of the special symbol is finished or the big hit is finished. do it.

  Next, if the total suspension storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total suspension storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol determination specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, is a probability variation flag indicating that it is a definite variation state, a time shortening flag indicating that it is a time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the time reduction state Is reset (step S132), and control is performed to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is “normal jackpot” or “probable jackpot”, the jackpot start designation command (command A 001 (H)) is transmitted. Also, when the type of the big hit is a sudden definite big hit, a small hit / sudden positive big hit start specification command (command A 002 (H)) is transmitted. In addition, data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer) indicating whether the type of jackpot is “normally jackpot”, “probably outburst jackpot”, or “suddenly outright probability big hit” It is determined based on

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit". 2 times in the case of "probably odd big hit") is set in the big winning opening open number counter (step S135) . In addition, round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden odd change big hit, 0.1 second is set as a round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a positive change big hit, 29 seconds is set as a round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time saving state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time saving number counter by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command (command A 002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time per large winning opening in the small hit game is also set. Specifically, the same 0.1 second as the round time of the sudden big change big hit is set as the open time per one big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a "big hit" or "probably big hit" sends a big hit end designation command (command A 301 (H)), and if it is "suddenly big hit" a small hit / sudden positive big hit The end designation command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit to be finished this time is normally a big hit (step S166). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  Usually, if it is not a big hit (that is, if it is a definite variation big hit or sudden definite variation big hit), the CPU 56 sets a definite variation flag and shifts to a definite variation state (step S169) and sets a short time flag to shift to a short time condition (Step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or not (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data in the display control processing of step S22 Based on, the latest stop symbol will continue to be displayed stopped until the next variable display is started. In addition, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (ie, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation processing), for the special symbol variation display The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a gap between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, the display result designation command transmission process also varies. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by one.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S 701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected and the display control of the effect display device 9 (including the display control of the effect design) Run.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S 707). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory view showing one configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 9 and 10) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process which is executed every 4 ms.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 specification command to display result 5 specification command) in the RAM The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is any of the big hit start designated commands (big hit start designated command, small hit / suddenly probability variation big hit start designated command) (step S621), the CPU 101 for production control receives the received big hit start designated command. A corresponding flag is set (step S622). In this case, for example, if the jackpot start designation command (command A 001 (H)) is received, the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, and the small hit / sudden oddity big hit start designation command (command A 002 (H)) If it is received, the small hit / sudden definite big hit start specification command reception flag is set.

  If the received effect control command is any of the big hit end specified commands (big hit end specified command, small hit / suddenly definite variation big hit end specified command) (step S623), the CPU 101 for production control receives the received big hit end specified command. The corresponding big hit end designated command reception flag is set (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S 628). For example, if the received effect control command is the first start winning specified command, the first start winning specified command reception flag is set, and if the received effect control command is the second start winning specified command, the second start winning specified command Set the reception flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control regarding variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S803): The change of the effect pattern is stopped and control is performed to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the CPU for effect control 101 resets the fluctuation pattern command reception flag (step S812), and the value of the effect control process flag corresponds to the effect pattern fluctuation start process (step S801). The value is updated (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted also at the time of power failure recovery (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, it is normal time Since, based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command is received, it moves to the production design fluctuation start processing and starts the fluctuation indication of the production design, the fluctuation of the production design only by receiving the display result specification command without receiving the fluctuation pattern command The display does not start.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect pattern (stopped) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8001). That is, the processing of step S8001 is executed by the effect control CPU 101, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect pattern according to the variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, CPU101 for production control is the chance eye design (for example, "223" and "445" etc.) as a temporary stop symbol of a pseudo run in step S8001. Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined. In addition, it may be made to provide the false ream only symbol used only as a temporary stop symbol of a false gangmate instead of or in addition to a chance eye pattern as a temporary pause design of a false gangmate. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8001, the CPU for effect control 101 may determine whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the production symbol based only on the fluctuation pattern command. .

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 29, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. As the symbols, the combination of the effect symbols is determined by the even symbols (“2”, “4”, “6” or “8”) having the same three symbols. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probable big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control has 3 symbols as a stop symbol Determine the combination of the rendering symbols aligned with the same odd symbols ("1", "3", "5" or "7").

  Also, if the received display result specification command indicates "Suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit" (if the received display result specification command is the display result 4 specification command or the display result 5 specification command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol.

  Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of effect symbols are associated with numerical values, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design. In addition, a symbol (in this embodiment, an odd symbol) that reminds of being in a definite variation state is also referred to as a definite variation symbol, and a symbol (in this embodiment, an even symbol) that reminds of not becoming a definite variation condition is not definite symbol It is also called.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the bonus character announcement effect (step S8003a). Then, when it is determined that the feature preview effect is to be executed (Y in step S8003b), the CPU 101 for effect control has a flag feature standby effect flag indicating that it is determined to execute the feature preview effect. The setting is made (step S8003c).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the button speech notification effect, and the effect mode in the case of execution (step S8004a). Then, when it is determined that the button serif notice effect is to be executed (Y in step S8004b), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the effect mode of the determined button serif notice effect, and executes the button serif notice effect. In step S8004c, a button serif notification effect waiting flag indicating that the button is determined is set.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a button cut-in notification effect, and determines an effect mode in the case of execution (step S8005a). Then, when it is determined to execute the button cut-in notification effect (Y in step S8005 b), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the effect mode of the determined button cut-in notification effect, and the button cut-in notification effect The button cut-in notice effect standby flag is set to indicate that it is decided to execute (step S8005 c).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a lever advance effect, and determines an effect mode in the case of execution (step S8006a). Then, when it is determined to execute the lever advance effect (Y in step S8006b), the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect mode of the lever advance effect determined, and determines to execute the lever advance effect. In step S8006c, a lever preview effect waiting flag indicating that the game is being performed is set. Then, it transfers to step S8008.

  The prize preview effect is an effect in which control is performed to temporarily move the prize 200 from the initial position to the effect position. In addition, the button serif announcement effect and the button cut-in announcement effect are accompanied by an operation prompting prompting the operation of the push button 120, and are effects executed based on the operation of the push button 120 during the detection effective period. is there. In the button serif announcement effect and the button cut-in announcement effect, when the corresponding detection effective period starts, the effect display device 9 performs operation promotion notification for urging the push button 120 (for example, An operation prompting image simulating the appearance of the push button 120 and a remaining effective period image showing the remaining period of the detection effective period are displayed (see FIGS. 38B to 38E). Then, based on the fact that the operation of the push button 120 has been detected at least once during the detection effective period, a button speech notification effect image or a button cut in notification effect image (for example, an image in which the character says a predetermined serif, or a predetermined The image showing the possibility of becoming a big hit, such as an image in which the message of is shown, is displayed.

  The lever advance presentation effect is an effect that is executed based on the operation of the stick controller 122 being performed during the detection effective period, with an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the stick controller 122. In the lever preview effect, at the timing when the corresponding detection effective period starts, in the effect display device 9, an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed (for example, the appearance of the stick controller 122 is simulated) The operation prompting image and the remaining effective period image indicating the remaining period of the detection effective period are displayed. Then, based on the fact that the operation of the stick controller 122 has been detected at least once during the detection effective period, a lever advance notice effect image (for example, an image showing whether or not a big hit) is displayed. In the present embodiment, "promotion" is used not to mean that the player's operation is advanced, but to mean that the player's operation is prompted (solicited).

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory view showing an example of execution timings of a bonus announcement production, a button speech announcement production, a button cut-in announcement production and a lever announcement production. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30 (A), the feature announcement notice and the button speech notice announcement are executed before the variable display reaches the reach state. In addition, the button cut-in notice effect and the lever notice effect are executed after reaching the reach state. The lever advance notice effect is executed later than the button cut-in notice effect. Specifically, it is executed immediately before fluctuating stop (that is, immediately before the leading off symbol or the big hit symbol is derived and displayed).

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30A, the feature announcement notice and the button speech announcement notice are performed at the same time. Then, by executing the feature previewing effect and the button speech previewing effect at the same time, the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image displayed by the button speech previewing effect are moved to the rendering position by the character previewing effect. The object 200 is covered by the object 200 and difficult to be recognized, and the player may miss the detection effective period (i.e., the button speech notification effect). Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection effective period of the button serif announcement effect is ended after completion of the feature announcement effect, that is, after the state in which the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are difficult to be viewed is resolved. Is configured. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), after the character 200 moved to the effect position by the start of the character preview effect is returned to the initial position by the completion of the character preview effect. The detection period of the button speech preview effect is configured to end. By configuring in this manner, even if the feature preview effect and the button speech preview effect are executed at the same time, and the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are covered by the feature 200 and it becomes temporarily difficult to view, Since the state which is difficult to visually recognize during the detection effective period is resolved, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the detection effective period (that is, the button speech notification effect).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), the button speech preview effect is started and the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are displayed, and then the character preview effect is started after a predetermined period, and the character 200 is at the effect position. By being configured to be moved to, the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image can be viewed without being covered by the accessory 200 after being displayed at least, for a predetermined period. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the detection effective period (that is, the button speech notification effect) even when the character item announcement effect and the button speech notification effect are executed at the same time. Can.

  In this embodiment, the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are a predetermined period before the start of the bonus preview effect by making the start timing and the end timing of the bonus preview effect and the button speech preview effect different from each other. And, it is configured to be visible without being covered by the prize 200 for a predetermined period after the end, but at least either the predetermined period before the start of the feature preview effect or the predetermined period after the end can be viewed It may be provided as a period. That is, the button speech preview effect and the feature preview production are simultaneously started, and the character preview production may end earlier, and the button speech preview effect may end after the predetermined period has elapsed, or the button speech preview may be performed first. The presentation may be started, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the announcement notice presentation may be started, and the button speech announcement announcement and the announcement notice presentation may be ended simultaneously.

  Note that in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the bonus item announcement effect and the button speech announcement effect at the same time, but the execution periods may be completely matched and executed, or one of the execution periods may be executed. It may be executed so that the parts overlap. However, even when the execution period is completely matched, it is desirable to provide a period in which the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image are not difficult to view within the detection effective period. For example, an operation mode (for example, movement start timing or movement speed to movement position, movement route, stop period at presentation position, movement start timing or movement speed to movement to initial position, movement path) This can be realized by adjusting the display mode (for example, display size or display position) of the remaining effective period image. Specifically, the movement to the effect position is started after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the bonus item presentation effect (the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image can be viewed for a predetermined period of time from the start) The movement from the effect position to the initial position may be started before the predetermined period when the feature preview effect ends (the operation promotion image or the entire area of the remaining effective period image may be hidden by the bonus 200) The area to be reduced gradually decreases, and a visible period is secured).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image by the button serif announcement effect are configured so as not to be completely obscured even if the character 200 moves to the effect position (FIG. 38 (FIG. See D). That is, although the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image by the button serif announcement effect may be covered by the character 200 moved to the effect position by the character announcement effect and may be difficult to visually recognize, it may not be completely visible. Instead, it is always configured to be partially visible. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the detection valid period (that is, the button speech notification effect) even if the character announcement notification effect and the button speech notification effect are executed at the same time. Can.

  Also, in general, the effects performed after reaching the reach state are more important than the effects performed before the reach state. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), the feature previewing which may make it difficult to visually recognize the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image is executed only before reaching the reach state. Is configured as. By configuring in this manner, the feature preview effect and the effect of high importance (for example, the effect to be executed after reaching the reach such as button cut-in advance effect or lever advance effect) are executed at the same time, and the player It is possible to avoid the situation where the attention of people is dispersed.

  Note that the timings of executing the bonus announcement production, the button speech announcement production, the button cut-in announcement production and the lever announcement production are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 30, but may be any timing during fluctuation. Further, the timing to execute these effects may be any timing during the big hit game. In addition, when performing these effects during the big hit game, it is suggested that it is controlled to a definite change state or time saving state after an increase in the number of rounds or the big hit game based on the detection of the predetermined operation. It is also good.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a prize announcement presentation execution judgment table, a button speech announcement presentation execution judgment table, a button cut-in announcement presentation execution judgment table and a lever announcement presentation execution judgment table.

  In step S8003a, it is determined whether or not to execute a bonus character preview effect using the bonus product effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 31 (A).

  31 (A), determination values corresponding to the determined items ("No execution" and "execution") are assigned to each variation pattern, but FIG. In the example shown in A), in order to simplify the explanation, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for setting the bonus character announcement effect, and determines it as the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 31 (A), the numerical values corresponding to the determination items ("No execution" and "with execution") in each variation pattern indicate the percentage (%) at which each determination item is selected. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 31 (A), in the case of the variation pattern of shortening variation and deviation (for example, in the case of non-reach PA1-2 shown in FIG. 6), the feature previewing effect is not executed at a ratio of 95%. It is determined that a feature preview effect will be performed at a rate of 5%. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (for example, in the case of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 and normal PB2-2 shown in FIG. It is decided not to carry out, and it is decided to carry out the feature preview effect at a rate of 25%. Also, in the case of the fluctuation pattern per normal reach (for example, in the case of normal PA2-3, normal PA2-4, normal PB2-3 and normal PB2-4 shown in FIG. It is decided not to execute and it is decided to execute the feature preview effect at a rate of 50%. Moreover, in the case of the variation pattern of the super reach loss (for example, in the case of the super PA 3-1, the normal PA 3-2, the normal PB 3-1 and the normal PB 3-2 shown in FIG. It is determined not to execute the effect, and it is determined to execute the feature preview effect at a rate of 70%. Also, in the case of the fluctuation pattern per super reach (for example, in the case of normal PA3-3, normal PA3-4, normal PB3-3 and normal PB3-4 shown in FIG. It is decided not to execute the effect, and it is decided to execute the feature preview effect at a rate of 85%.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the item preview effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 31 (A), the button serif preview effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 31 (B), and the button cut shown in FIG. 31 (C) Although the judgment values are actually assigned to the in advance notice effect execution judgment table and the lever advance notice effect execution judgment table shown in FIG. 31 (D), the ratio of the judgment values assigned to simplify the explanation is It is shown. Also, in steps S8004a, S8005a, and S8006a in which those tables are used, as in step S8003a, for example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number, and a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned. Determine what you have.

  In step S8004a, step S8005a, and step S8006a, using the button serif announcement effect execution determination table, the button cut-in announcement effect execution determination table, and the lever announcement effect execution determination table shown in FIGS. 31 (B) to (D), respectively Whether or not to execute is determined (decision is made as either "no execution", "execution with first effect mode" and "execution with second effect mode"). In addition, deciding to "does not perform" is deciding to not perform the effect, and it is decided that "is in execution, first effect mode" or "is in execution, second effect mode" That is, it is determined to execute the rendering in the rendering mode of the “first rendering mode” or the “second rendering mode”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), it is possible to execute the button serif announcement effect in the effect mode of the “first effect mode” or the “second effect mode”. For example, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected within the detection effective period of the button serif notice effect, the first button serif notice effect image indicating the character saying the line of “?” Is displayed in the “first effect mode”. In the "second effect mode", a second button speech dialogue notice effect image showing a character that says a speech of "chance!" Is displayed. Hereinafter, the first button serif notification effect image and the second button serif notification effect image may be collectively referred to as button serif notification effect images.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31C, the button cut-in notice effect can be executed in the effect mode of the “first effect mode” or the “second effect mode”. For example, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected within the detection effective period of the button cut-in notice effect, a first button cut-in notice effect image showing a message of “appropriate!” Is displayed in the “first effect mode”. In the “second effect mode”, a second button cut-in notice effect image showing a message of “excessive heat!” Is displayed. Hereinafter, the first button cut-in notice effect image and the second button cut-in notice effect image may be collectively referred to as a button cut-in notice effect image.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31D, the lever advance notice effect can be executed in the effect mode of the “first effect mode” or the “second effect mode”. For example, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected within the detection effective period of the lever advance presentation effect, a first lever announcement effect image indicating the character of "defeat ..." is displayed in the "first effect mode", and " In the second effect mode, a second lever advance notice effect image indicating the word "winning!" Is displayed. Hereinafter, the first lever preview image and the second lever preview image may be collectively referred to as a lever preview image.

  What is characteristic in each effect execution determination table shown in FIGS. 31 (A) to (D) is that if the variation pattern includes super reach rather than the variation pattern not including super reach, the display result is also The determination value is set such that the percentage determined to be “performed” is higher if the jackpot is larger than the departure. By providing such a feature, the rate at which a variation pattern (e.g., develop into a super reach) of advantageous rendering pattern is higher when the rendering is performed is higher than when the rendering is not performed. And the rate at which the display result is a big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the execution of the feature preview effect, the button speech preview effect, the button cut-in preview effect, and the lever preview effect.

  Further, in each effect execution determination table shown in FIGS. 31 (B) to (D), the characteristic is that the variation pattern including the super reach is displayed more than the variation pattern not including the super reach. The determination value is set such that the proportion determined as the “second effect mode” becomes higher than the “first effect mode” if the result is a big hit rather than an off state. By having such a feature, the variation pattern (for example, developing into a super reach) of the advantageous design pattern is more advantageous when executed in the “second effect mode” than the “first effect mode”. The rate at which the display result is a big hit can be made high. That is, the “second effect mode” is a effect mode having a higher degree of expectation than the “first effect mode”. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to which effect mode the button speech preview effect, the button cut-in advance effect, and the lever advance effect are executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the button serif announcement effect is executed before reaching the reach state, and the button cut-in announcement effect is executed after the reach state (see FIG. 30A). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31C, the button cut-in notice effect is executed only in the case of the variation pattern including the super reach. Therefore, the button cut-in notice effect is an effect having a high expectation of becoming a variation mode (for example, developing into a super reach) of the effect pattern more advantageous than the button serif notifying effect, and a high expectation of becoming a big hit. In other words, it can be said that the effect is highly important. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the button cut-in notice effect with a high degree of expectation (that is, the degree of importance) is executed, the feature notice effect is not performed at the same time (FIG. 30A). reference). By configuring in this way, it is possible to focus attention on effects that have a high degree of expectation (that is, importance), and it is possible to perform effects effectively.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31D, in the case of the fluctuation pattern including the super reach, the lever advance notice effect is always executed. Then, when the display result is a release, a first lever advance notice effect image indicating the character of "loss ..." is displayed (a lever advance notice effect is executed according to the first effect mode), and the display result is a big hit In this case, a second lever advance notice effect image indicating the character of "winning!" Is displayed (a lever advance notice effect is executed according to the second effect mode). That is, the lever advance notice effect is an effect that indicates whether the display result is a loss or a big hit. Therefore, compared with the button serif announcement effect or the button cut-in announcement effect which suggests the possibility that the lever announcement effect will become the fluctuation aspect (for example, developing into the super reach) of the advantageous production pattern or the possibility of becoming a big hit , It is an effect of high importance. Therefore, in this embodiment, even when a lever advance notice effect is executed, a feature advance notice effect is not executed at the same time (see FIG. 30A). By configuring in this way, it is possible to focus attention on effects that have a high degree of expectation (that is, importance), and it is possible to perform effects effectively.

  Further, in this embodiment, the lever advance notice effect executed based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 122 is the button serif notice effect executed based on the detection of the operation of the push button 120 or the like. The degree of expectation (that is, the degree of importance) is configured to be higher than that of the button cut-in notice effect. By this configuration, it is possible to differentiate the effects and to give the player a sense of expectation for the operation of the stick controller 122. In other words, it is possible to give the player a special feeling of expectation about performing a specific operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, among the effects to be executed based on the detection of the player's action, the effect to be executed based on the detection of the operation of the push button 120 (in this example, the button serif notice In the stage effect), the feature preview effect may be executed at the same time, but the lever preview effect executed based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 122 is the feature preview effect at the same time It is configured not to be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate the effects and to make the effects easy to understand.

  In this embodiment, the timing at which each of the character preview effect, the button speech preview effect, the button cut-in preview effect, and the lever preview effect is determined is determined. It is possible to perform the feature preview effect and button speech preview effect at a plurality of timings before reaching reach) and after reaching the reach, or at a plurality of timings after the reach is established. It may be made executable. In this case, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the timing at which the effect is performed. However, in order to pay attention to the effect with a high degree of expectation (importance) and to effectively perform the effect, the feature advance notice effect may not be executed at the same time as the button cut-in advance notice effect or the lever advance notice effect. desirable.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown to FIG. 31 (A), although it is comprised so that a character thing preliminary | backup advance production | presentation may be performed by a single production | presentation aspect, it is good also as executable by two or more kinds of presentation appearances. . For example, depending on the effect mode, the period during which the accessory 200 stops at the effect position may be different, or the effect sound output at the time of movement of the accessory 200 may be different, or The light emitting body such as the LED provided in the light source may be lighted in a different mode. Also in this case, the suggested degree of expectation may differ depending on the presentation mode. In addition, the feature previewing effect of the rendering aspect having a high degree of expectation may be configured not to be performed at the same time as the button speech preview rendering.

  In addition, the role feature 200 may be used for effects other than the feature preview effect performed after the start of the change. For example, it may be used also for effects performed when reach is established, when reach is developed, when a big hit is determined, or the like.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 31, the variation pattern is divided into five types, and it is determined whether or not each presentation is to be performed, and the presentation mode in the case of execution is determined. Absent. For example, also for variation patterns including super reach, depending on the type of super reach (in this example, super reach A or super reach B in this example), it is determined whether or not to perform each effect, the effect mode in the case of executing You may do so.

  Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 31D, the lever advance notice effect may not be performed at a constant rate even in the case of a super reach failure or a super reach.

  In this embodiment, the operation of the player is detected by detecting whether the operation of the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an infrared sensor, an optical sensor, etc. The motion of the player may be detected by a non-contact type sensor. Also in this case, depending on the degree of expectation, the operation of the player serving as an opportunity to execute the effect may be different. For example, the effect performed based on the detection of the operation by the non-contact type sensor has a higher expectation than the effect performed based on the detection of the operation of the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 It may be

  In step S8008 of the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step S8008), and starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8009).

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect pattern. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 32 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In this embodiment, by executing predetermined processing (for example, the processing of steps S8106 to S8175 described later) in the effect symbol variation processing, the character article announcement effect, the button speech announcement effect, the button cut-in announcement effect and Since the lever advance presentation effect is realized, the process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected in step S8008 regardless of which of these effects is executed. Note that scenario data (corresponding to a process table in this example) corresponding to the presence or absence of each effect is stored in advance, and processing is performed based on the data to realize each button effect. Although this can be done, each effect can be realized while suppressing an increase in the amount of data by adopting the configuration of this embodiment.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is described where it is possible to execute a feature previewing effect, a button speech previewing effect, a button cut-in previewing effect and a lever previewing effect as effects during variation. It may be determined whether or not the mini character preview effect etc. is to be executed, and the preview effect may be executed based on the determination result. If it is decided to execute such a notice effect, a process table corresponding to the notice effect may be selected in step S8008. That is, even if scenario data (corresponding to a process table in this example) corresponding to the presence or absence of each notice effect is stored in advance and the process is executed based on those data, the notice effect can be realized. Good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect device (effect display device 9 as a effect component, effect component as a effect component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8010). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. In addition, in order to output sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8011).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802) (step S8012).

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls variable display of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  FIG. 33 to FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing the process (step S802) during effect symbol variation in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S8105).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the in-figure preview effect executing flag indicating that the in-figure preview effect is being executed is set (step S8106). When the flag preview effect execution flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8112.

  If the bonus character announcement effect in-progress flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the bonus character preview effect waiting flag is set (step S8107). If the bonus character presentation effect waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  If the feature preview effect waiting flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the feature preview effect (that is, the timing to move the feature 200 to the effect position by the feature preview effect). (Step S8108). If it is not the start timing of the feature preview effect, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  If it is the start timing of the feature preview effect, the effect control CPU 101 resets the feature preview effect waiting flag (step S8109) and sets the flag of the feature preview effect under execution (step 8110). Further, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the character 200 to move from the initial position to the effect position (step S8111). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  In step S8112, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not it is the end timing (that is, the timing to move the character 200 from the effect position to the initial position) of the effect notification of the effect notification (step S8112). Then, if it is the end timing of the prize preview effect, control is performed to move the prize 200 from the effect position to the initial position (step S8113). Further, the CPU for effect control 101 resets a flag during the execution of the bonus character announcement effect (step S8114). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8120.

  In step S8120, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the button serif notification effect enabling flag indicating that the button serif notification effect is being detected is in effect (step S8120). If the button serif notification effect effective flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8127.

  If the button serif announcement effect effective flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the button serif announcement effect standby flag is set (step S8121). If the button serif notification effect waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8134.

  When the button serif notice effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the button serif notice effect (that is, the detection start period of the button serif notice effect) Step S8122). If it is not the start timing of the button serif announcement effect, the process proceeds to step S8134.

  When it is the start timing of the button serif notice effect, that is, when the start time of the button serif notice effect detection start period, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button serif notice effect standby flag (step S8123) and the button. A speech advance notice effect effective flag is set (step 8124). In addition, the effect control CPU 101, in the effect display device 9, as an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the push button 120, an operation promotion image of an aspect in which the push button 120 is not jumped out (see FIG. 38 (B) etc. While displaying the effect of the operation of other operation units and displaying the remaining effective period image, control is performed (steps S8125 and S8126). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8127.

  The other operation unit of the push button 120 is the stick controller 122 and the trigger button 121 in this embodiment, but may be an operation unit operable by the player. For example, it may be a handle button which is an operation unit provided on the hitting operation handle 5. In addition, settings such as the setting of the volume of the effect sound, the setting of the brightness of the lamp such as the effect display device 9 and the frame LED 28, the setting of the effect mode, and the setting for acquisition on the portable terminal such as the game history It may be a cross key or an enter key.

  In this embodiment, depending on the remaining period of the detection effective period, the ratio of the indication area in the meter display area is different and the remaining effective period image is updated and displayed to indicate the remaining period of the detection effective period. It is configured. That is, the meter display area in the remaining effective period image indicates the entire detection effective period, and the indication region indicates the remaining period of the detection effective period. Specifically, when the detection effective period is started, the remaining effective period image in which the indication area occupies the entire area of the meter display area (for example, the remaining effective period image 202 shown in FIG. A remaining effective period image (for example, the remaining effective period shown in FIG. 38C) in which the proportion of the indication region to the meter display region decreases according to the decrease in the remaining period of the detection effective period. The image 202) is displayed, and when the detection valid period ends (or when a predetermined operation is detected), a remaining valid period image in which the proportion of the indication area in the meter display area is 0 is displayed. Therefore, the player can grasp the remaining period of the detection effective period by confirming the state of the remaining effective period image. In this embodiment, the remaining effective period image in which the ratio of the indication area to the meter display area is 0 is also referred to as the effective period end image, and the effective period detection end is ended by displaying the effective period end image. The notification of the end of the detection effective period to notify that is performed.

  In step S8127, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether an operation of any of the operation units has been detected (step S8127). When the operation of any of the operation units is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect symbol variation start processing in the effect display device 9 according to the effect mode of the button serif notification effect stored and stored. Control is performed to display a button serif announcement effect image (for example, an image showing a character that says a serif of “?” Or “chance!”) (Step S8128). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed remaining effective period image in the effect display device 9 (step S8128a).

  In other words, when the push button 120 does not jump out, the operation promotion image of the push button 120 does not jump out, and the operation other than the push button 120 with respect to the mode not jumped out is regarded as valid. Even when the unit is operated, an effect in the same effect mode as when the push button 120 is operated is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed operation promotion image in the effect display device 9 (step S8129). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended (step S8130). For example, an image including characters such as "end" is displayed. Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button serif notification effect effective flag (step S8131). The button speech notification effect image and the effective period end image are erased after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  In step S8127, if no operation of any operation unit is detected either, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether it is the end timing of the button serif announcement effect (that is, the end timing of the detection period of the button serif announcement effect). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S8132). Then, if it is the end timing of the button serif announcement effect, the process proceeds to step S8129. Also, if it is not the end timing of the button speech notification effect, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image according to the remaining period of the detection effective period (step S8133). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8134.

  If it is determined in step S8132 that the button serif announcement end timing is reached, the process may proceed to step S8128a. Further, the process of step S8130 may not be performed.

  In step S8134, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a button cut-in advance notification effect effective flag indicating that the button cut-in notification effect is being detected is in effect (step S8134). If the button cut-in advance announcement effect effective flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8141.

  If the button cut-in advance notice effect effective flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the button cut-in advance notice waiting flag is set (step S8135). If the button cut-in notification effect waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8162.

  If the button cut-in notice effect standby flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the button cut-in notice effect (that is, the detection start period of the button cut-in notice effect). It confirms (step S8136). If it is not the start timing of the button cut-in notification effect, the process proceeds to step S8162.

  If it is the start timing of the button cut-in notification effect, that is, the detection start period of the button cut-in notification effect, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button cut-in notification effect standby flag (step S8137). At the same time, the button cut-in notice effect effective flag is set (step 8138). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 is an operation promotion image in which the push button 120 of an aspect different from the operation promotion display in step S8125 jumps out as an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the push button 120 in the effect display device 9 (described later 39B) and the effect that the operation of the other operation unit is invalid, and controls the button fly actuator 128 to execute the control of causing the push button 120 to fly, and the remaining valid Control to display the period image is performed (steps S8139A, S8139B, S8140). Then, it transfers to step S8141.

  In step S8141, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation of the push button 120 has been detected (step S8141). When the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines, in the effect display processing, the effect pattern start processing in the effect display device 9 according to the effect mode of the button cut-in notice effect stored. Control to display a cut-in notice effect image (for example, a first button cut-in notice effect image indicating a message of “good opportunity!”, Or a second button cut-in notice effect image indicating a message of “superheat!”) (Step S8142). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed remaining effective period image in the effect display device 9 (step S8142a).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to delete the displayed operation promotion image in the effect display device 9 (step S8143). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended (step S8144). For example, an image including characters such as "end" is displayed. Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the button jumping actuator 128 to execute a control for retracting the push button 120 (step S8144A). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the button cut-in advance notification effect effective flag (step S8145). The button cut-in notice effect image and the effective period end image are erased after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  In step S8141, when the operation of the push button 120 is not detected, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the operation of another operation unit different from the push button 120 is detected (step S8148). If an operation of another operation unit is detected, the effect control CPU 101 displays that the operation is invalid (see FIG. 39D) (step S8149). The display indicating that the operation is invalid is deleted after being displayed for a short time (for example, about one second), and if it is within the valid period of the operation, the original operation promotion display is displayed.

  That is, when the operation promoting image of the push button 120 is in a mode in which the push button 120 is jumping out, the operation of the operation unit other than the push button 120 with respect to the jumping out mode is not made effective determination. When the operation unit is operated, an effect different from the effect to the operation of the push button 120 (effect to notify that the operation of the operation unit other than the push button 120 is invalid) is executed.

  When the operation of the other operation unit is not detected, and after step S8149, the effect control CPU 101 is the end timing of the button cut-in notice effect (that is, the detection valid period end time of the button cut-in notice effect). Whether or not it is confirmed (step S8146). Then, if it is the end timing of the button cut-in notice effect, the process proceeds to step S8143. If the end timing of the button cut-in advance notice effect is not reached, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image according to the remaining period of the detection effective period (step S8147). Then, it transfers to step S8162.

  If it is determined in step S8146 that the end timing of the button serif cut-in notification effect is reached, the process may move to step S8142a. Also, the process of step S8144 may not be performed.

  In the embodiment described above, when the player presses the push button 120 and then the push button 120 is released while the push button 120 is jumping out, the push button 120 jumps out to the original state. In order to return, it is necessary to execute an operation for retracting the push button 120 in step S8144A.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the push button 120 is in a mode in which the push button 120 is flying, if the player presses the push button 120 until the mode is not in a mode in which it does not fly You may make it maintain the aspect which has not come out. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the operation of retracting the push button 120 in step S8144A.

  Also, in this case, if the player does not press the push button 120 in the middle until the push button 120 is pressed, the push button 120 is not popped up next. The mode may be maintained as it is until it is pressed. In this case, when the push button 120 is pressed until the push button 120 is not popped up next, the push button 120 is maintained as it is.

  In addition, when the player presses the push button 120 until the button is not popped out, the process of step S8144A is not performed, but the player does not press the push button 120 at all, and the push button 120 The process of step S8144A may be executed only when the player stops pressing in the middle of the process until the player does not fly out.

  In step S8162, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not a lever advance announcement effect effective flag indicating that it is in the detection effective period of the lever advance announcement effect is set (step S8162). If the lever advance announcement effect effective flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8169.

  If the lever advance notice effect effective flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the lever advance notice effect standby flag is set (step S8163). If the lever preview effect waiting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8176.

  If the lever advance presentation effect waiting flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the lever advance presentation effect (that is, the detection start period of the lever advance effect presentation) (step S8164) . If it is not the start timing of the lever advance presentation effect, the process proceeds to step S8176.

  When it is the start timing of the lever advance effect, that is, when the detection start period of the lever advance effect is started, the effect control CPU 101 resets the lever advance effect standby flag (step S8165) and the lever advance effect is effective. The flag is set (step 8166). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to display the operation promotion image and display the remaining effective period image as an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the stick controller 122 (steps S8167 and S8168). . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8169.

  In step S8169, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation of the stick controller 122 has been detected (step S8169). When the operation of the stick controller 122 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 determines in the effect display processing in the effect display device 9 a lever advance effect according to the effect mode of the lever advance effect determined and stored. Control is performed to display an image (for example, a first lever advance notice effect image indicating the character of "losing ..." or a second lever advance notice image indicating the character of "win!") (Step S8170). Further, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to erase the displayed remaining effective period image (step S8170a).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to delete the displayed operation promotion image (step S8171). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display an effective period end image indicating that the detection effective period has ended (step S8172). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the lever advance notification effect effective flag (step S8173). The lever advance presentation effect image and the effective period end image are erased after being displayed for a predetermined period.

  In step S8169, when the operation of the stick controller 122 is not detected, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether it is the end timing of the lever advance effect (that is, the detection valid period end timing of the lever advance effect). It confirms (step S8174). And if it is the completion | finish timing of lever advance production, it will transfer to step S8171. Also, if it is not the end timing of the lever advance presentation effect, the effect control CPU 101 updates the remaining effective period image according to the remaining period of the detection effective period (step S8175). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8176.

  In step S8176, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step S8176), the CPU for effect control 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S803) Step S8177).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S8130, S8144, and S8172 in the effect symbol variation processing, even when a predetermined operation is performed before the end of the detection valid period, the detection is valid. Since the period end notification is performed, it is possible to easily recognize that the detection effective period has ended based on the operation.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, after displaying the button serif notice effect image, the button cut-in notice effect image and the lever notice effect image, the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image are erased, and the effective period ends. Although it is configured to display an image, for example, after deleting the operation promotion image and the remaining effective period image and displaying the effective period end image, a button speech notification effect image, a button cut in advance effect image, and a lever The preview effect image may be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image are configured to be deleted at the end timing of the detection period of the button serif notification effect image and the button cut-in advance effect and lever advance effect detection. However, the operation prompting image and the remaining valid period image (or only one of them) may be deleted before the predetermined period of time when the detection valid period ends. By configuring in this manner, the operation performed at the timing when the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image are deleted is not detected as the operation within the detection effective period, and the player may feel distrust Can be avoided. In this case, it is desirable that the difficult-to-view state by the accessory 200 be resolved before a predetermined period of time at which the operation promoting image and the remaining effective period image (or only one of them) are erased.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the big hit symbol has been displayed in a stopped state but fanfare production has not yet been executed, so the process of finalizing the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed The process moves to step S8305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S8301a), and if it is not set, the processing ends.

  If the confirmation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the confirmation command reception flag (step S8301b). Further, control is performed to display the stop symbol (off symbol, big hit symbol) of the rendering symbol that has been determined (step S8302).

  Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control shifts to step S8311. Do.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the big hit start designation commands has been received (step S8305). Note that whether or not any jackpot start designation command has been received, specifically, a flag (big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received, This determination can be made by checking whether a flag (small hit / suddenly sudden change big hit start specified command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / sudden sudden change big hit start specification command has been received is set. If one of the big hit start designation commands has been received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306). If the big hit start designated command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly definite big hit big start designation command received flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S8307). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the rendering device (rendering display device 9 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and speakers 27 as a rendering component) is executed according to data 1 and movable member control data 1) (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  If it is determined that neither a big hit nor a small hit is made (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation specification command reception flag and the second symbol variation specification command reception flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the feature previewing effect and the button speech previewing effect. In the effect display device 9, after the variable display of the effect pattern is started (FIG. 38 (A)), when the feature advance notice effect and the button speech advance notice effect are started, the control of moving the role object 200 to the effect position is While being started, on the display screen of the effect display device 9, an operation prompting image 201A imitating the appearance of the push button 120, the remaining effective period image 202, and the effect that operations other than the push button 120 are also displayed are displayed. (FIG. 38 (B)). Unlike the operation prompting image 201B described later with reference to FIG. 39 (B), the operation prompting image 201A simulates the appearance of the state in which the push button 120 is not jumped out. Then, the accessory 200 gradually moves toward the rendering position, and the remaining effective period image 202 indicates the remaining period according to the elapsed period (that is, according to the remaining period of the detection effective period) (see FIG. In the example of 38, the shaded area is updated) so that the proportion of the meter display area is reduced (FIG. 38 (C)).

  Next, when the prize 200 reaches the rendering position, it stops for a predetermined period (FIG. 38 (D)). At this time, the operation promoting image 201A by the button speech preview effect and the remaining effective period image 202 are obscured by the character 200 and difficult to be recognized. However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 (D), the operation promoting image 201A and the remaining effective period image 202 are configured to be larger in size than the accessory 200, so they are completely visible. It does not mean that it will not be possible, but some will always be visible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the detection effective period (that is, the button speech notification effect).

  Next, the bonus 200 stops at the effect position for a predetermined period, and then moves to the initial position (FIG. 38E). In this embodiment, the button speech preview effect is configured to end later than the feature preview effect. That is, the detection effective period of the button serif announcement effect is configured to end later than the period in which the operation prompting image 201A and the remaining effective period image 202 are in a state where visual recognition is difficult. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (E), the operation promoting image 201A and the remaining effective period image 202 are displayed on the effect display device after the character 200 returns to the initial position, that is, even after the hard-to-see state disappears. It is displayed on 9.

  Here, when the operation of the push button 120 or the other operation unit is detected, a first button serif announcement effect image 203 indicating a character saying the word “chance!” Is displayed (FIG. 38 (F)).

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the button cut-in notice effect. In the effect display device 9, after the variable display of the effect symbol is in the reach state (FIG. 39 (A)), when the button cut-in notice effect is started, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays FIG. The operation prompting image 201B different from the operation prompting image 201A of (B) and imitating the appearance of the state in which the push button 120 is jumping out, the remaining valid period image 202, and the operations other than the push button 120 are invalid. The message is displayed (FIG. 39 (B)).

  Here, when the operation of the push button 120 is detected, the cut-in image 204 including the character of “excessive heat!” Is displayed (FIG. 39 (C)). When the operation of the push button 120 is not detected and the operation of the other operation unit is detected, the cut-in image 205 including the character of "the operation is invalid" is displayed (FIG. 39D).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the detection means (in this example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122, etc.) capable of detecting the action of the player, and the movable member (the action of performing the predetermined action) In the example, an accessory 200) and detection effective period display means for displaying a detection effective period display (in this example, a remaining effective period image) indicating that the detection by the detection means is an effective detection effective period There is. Then, in the detection effective period display, a state where the at least a part is hidden by operating the movable member (for example, a state in which the remaining effective period image 202 shown in FIG. In some cases, the detection effective period ends later than the period in which the detection effective period display is in the difficult-to-view state (for example, as shown in FIG. After returning, i.e., after the invisibility state of the remaining effective period image is eliminated, the effective period of detection ends. Therefore, the movable member can be operated, and the player can be prevented from missing the detection effective period.

  For example, the movable member operates by simply combining the configuration for displaying the detection valid period display indicating that the detection by the detection means is an effective detection valid period, and the configuration for executing the effect for operating the movable member. As a result, the display of the detection effective period is concealed, and the player may miss the detection effective period. Therefore, in this embodiment, by configuring the detection effective period to end later than the period when the detection effective period display is in the visual recognition difficult state by the movable member, it is possible to execute the effect of operating the movable member The player is prevented from missing the detection effective period.

  In this embodiment, the operation of the player is detected by detecting whether the operation of the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the push button 120 or the stick controller may be used. Whether or not an operation such as continuous hit operation or long press operation has been detected or whether or not an operation to input predetermined information (for example, a specific command or the like) has been performed using the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 etc. By this, the action of the player may be detected. Also, in place of or in addition to the push button 120 and the stick controller 122, when the operation of the player is detected, a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor for inputting a detection signal is provided. The motion of the player may be detected.

  Further, in this embodiment, at least a part of the detection effective period display can be visually recognized even when it is in the visually difficult state (for example, as shown in FIG. 38D, the remaining effective period image 202 is Even in the state of being obscured by the accessory 200, it does not mean that it becomes completely invisible, but a part is always visible. Therefore, the movable member can be operated, and the player can be prevented from missing the detection effective period.

  In this embodiment, the detection effective period display (in this example, the remaining effective period image) is configured such that at least a part can be visually recognized even in the visual difficulty state. It may be configured to be in a hard-to-see state where the member (in this example, the accessory 200) is completely concealed by the operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, the movable member operates as an example in the case where the display of the detection effective period is in the visual recognition difficult state (in this example, the role object 200 moves to the rendering position and stops for a predetermined period) Although the description has been made of the state in which the portion overlapping with the movable member is not visible and only the portion not overlapping is visible, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the movable member operates continuously (specifically, the bonus 200 The control of moving the front of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is repeatedly performed to make the detection effective period display inconspicuous (the remaining effective period image can be viewed at a timing when it is difficult to see but does not overlap with the feature 200) A state in which the detection effective period display is hard to be seen by overlapping the semi-transparent movable member with the detection effective period display (the remaining effective through the symbol 200 of things that are difficult to see During image visually recognizable), etc. are also included when detection validity indication is concealment state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect execution means for executing the effect during the variable display is provided, and the effect execution means detects the effect based on the detection means detecting the action of the player (in this example, the button Detection effect executing means for executing serif announcement effect, button cut-in announcement effect, lever announcement effect, movable member effect execution means for executing movable member effect (in this example, bonus object announcement effect) for operating the movable member In the period before the variable display reaches the reach state, the detection effect and the movable member effect can be performed at the same time (for example, as shown in FIG. 30A, the period before the reach state). In the above, the button serif announcement effect and the feature announcement effect can be performed at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to important effects and to perform effects effectively.

  In addition, "performing a detection effect and a movable member effect at the same time" is a concept including not only the thing in which an execution period corresponds completely but the thing in which a part of execution periods overlaps. Even when the execution periods of the detection effect and the movable member effect completely coincide with each other, the operation mode of the movable member (for example, the movement start timing or movement speed to the effect position, the moving path, the stopping period at the effect position, initial stage The detection valid period display (in this example, within the detection valid period) by adjusting the movement start timing to the position, the moving speed, the moving route), and the display mode (for example, display size or display position) of the detection valid period display It is possible to provide a period in which the remaining effective period image is not in a difficult-to-see state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the detection effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of detection effects (in this example, button serif announcement effect, button cut-in announcement effect, lever announcement effect, etc.) having different degrees of expectation, The execution means does not simultaneously execute the detection effect and the movable member effect whose expectation is higher than the predetermined degree (in this example, the button cut-in notification effect and the expectation (importance) higher than the button serif notification effect and It is configured such that it is not performed at the same time as the lever preview effect and the feature preview effect (see FIG. 30). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the effect with a high degree of expectation.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of detection means (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122) capable of detecting the motions of players different from each other are provided, and the detection effect execution means comprises the plurality of detection means. The specific detection effect (in this example, a lever advance effect in this example) can be executed based on the detection of the player's action by the specific detection means (in this example, the stick controller 122). The specific detection effect and the movable member effect are not performed at the same time (for example, the lever preview effect and the feature preview effect are not performed at the same time. See FIG. 30). Therefore, by providing a specific detection effect that is not executed simultaneously with the movable member effect, the effect can be made easy to understand. That is, among the detection effects performed based on the detection of the player's action, the detection effects performed based on the detection of the push button 120 by the player are performed at the same time as the bonus announcement effect. Although the specific detection effect performed based on the detection of the player by the stick controller 122 may not be performed at the same time as the feature preview effect, Differentiation of the detection effect can be achieved, and the effect can be made easy to understand.

  In this embodiment, the detection effect (in this example, the button cut-in advance effect and the lever advance effect) and the specific detection effect (in the present embodiment, the lever advance effect) are in the reach state. , And may be configured to be executable before reaching the reach state. In addition, even when it is executed before reaching the reach state, detection effect (in this example, button cut-in notice effect and lever notice effect) or specific detection effect (in this example, lever notice) The effect) may not be performed at the same time as the movable member effect (in the present example, the feature announcement effect).

  Further, in this embodiment, after the feature preview effect is finished by executing the character preview effect and the button speech preview effect according to a predetermined execution period and execution timing (that is, the remaining effective period image The detection validity period of the button serif announcement effect is ended after the recognition of the difficult-to-recognize condition), but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. The execution period and the execution timing of the speech advance notice effect are determined respectively, and the detection validity period by the button speech advance notice effect ends after the announcement notice effect is finished (that is, after the visual difficulty state of the remaining effective period image disappears). Thus, processing for adjusting the execution period and the execution timing may be performed. In addition, for example, in the production design fluctuation start processing, processing to determine the execution period and execution timing of the character announcement notice production and the button speech preview production respectively is performed, in the production pattern fluctuation processing, while performing the production according to the decision, In the case of performing control to operate the object 200, after the completion of the feature preview effect is completed by extending the execution period (that is, the detection valid period) of the button serif preview effect or shifting the execution timing (that is, Alternatively, the detection validity period by the button serif announcement effect may be ended after the visual difficulty state of the remaining validity period image is eliminated).

  Further, based on the detection of the player's motion detected by the detection means, the timing to execute the detection effect is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, but during the pseudo-series effect or during the advance notice effect, the big hit It may be any timing such as during presentation. In this case, one of the plurality of detection effects may be performed at different rates according to the timing of execution. For example, when performing a detection effect during a pseudo-series effect, before and after the temporary stop of the effect pattern in the pseudo-series effect (or depending on how many times the pseudo-series is performed), at different rates Either the button serif announcement effect or the button cut-in announcement effect may be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the movable member effect (in the present example, the character announcement effect) and the detection effect (in the present embodiment, the button speech announcement effect, the button cut-in announcement effect, the lever announcement effect) Although it has been suggested by different expectations that the jackpot symbol will be derived and displayed as an advantageous fluctuation mode (such as super reach) or the display result of the fluctuation display, it is not limited to this, and so-called prefetching notice As in the above, the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display based on any one of the reserved memories by different degrees of expectation. For example, a big hit occurs with a different degree of expectation by changing the hold display to any of a plurality of display modes based on movement of the movable member or detection of an operation during the detection effective period. It may be suggested that. Also in this case, the detection valid period is ended after the period in which the operation promoting image or the remaining valid period image is in the difficult-to-view state by the movable member, or the operation promoting image or the remaining valid period image is viewed It is desirable that at least a portion be always visible even in difficult situations.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of each production of button serif announcement notification production, button cut-in announcement presentation production, and lever announcement presentation production in production design fluctuation start processing may be determined It may be configured to determine in the middle processing. For example, in the effect design variation start process, whether or not each effect is to be executed, the detection effective period in the case of execution is determined, and the display is performed when the operation is detected during the detection effective period in the effect symbol processing. A presentation aspect such as an image to be output or a presentation sound to be output may be determined, and the presentation may be performed by the determined presentation aspect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but according to the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types according to the player's operation of the start lever The symbol is rotated, and when the symbol is stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, the combination of the stop symbol becomes a combination of a specific symbol, and this applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible. For example, in the case where the configuration described in the above embodiment is applied to a slot machine, a movable member effect for operating the movable member can be performed at an arbitrary timing such as during rotation of a symbol, and an operation promoting image and remaining valid A period image is displayed, and a detection effect is performed based on the operation of the stop button (or an operation button provided separately from the stop button), thereby causing a drop in a part (for example, a big bonus or a regular bonus). Alternatively, it may be configured to indicate the presence or absence of freeze effect, the result of RT (replay time) lottery, the result of AT (assist time) lottery, the result of ART (assist replay time) lottery, and the like. Also in this case, the detection valid period is ended after the period in which the operation promoting image and the remaining valid period image are difficult to be recognized by the movable member, or the operation promoting image and the remaining valid period image are viewed It is desirable that at least a part be visible so as to be visible even in a difficult state.

[Effect of First Embodiment]
The effects obtained by the embodiments described above are summarized below.

(1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
First operation means (for example, push button 120, trigger button 121, stick controller 122, handle button, cross key for setting, determination key for setting) operable by the player;
A second operation means (for example, an operation unit other than the push button 120 if the first operation means is the push button 120) operable by the player and different from the first operation means;
From the first aspect (for example, an aspect in which a button does not pop out as shown in FIG. 38 (B) or the like) or a second aspect (for example, from the first aspect) Operation prompting display means (for example, effect control microcomputer 100, effect display device 9, FIG. 34 step S8125, and FIG. 35 step S8139 A),
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect when the first operation means or the second operation means is operated based on the operation promotion display being performed by the operation promotion display means (for example, micro for effect control Computer 100 and effect display device 9);
The effect executing means is
When the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the first mode is regarded as valid determination (for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), FIG. As shown in step S8128 and FIG. 38F, the same effect mode as the first effect mode and the second effect mode of the button serif announcement effect image is executed.
When the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the second mode is not regarded as an effective determination (for example, step S8149 of FIG. 35, FIG. An effect of notifying that the operation is invalid is executed as indicated by).

  According to such a configuration, whether or not to determine the validity differs depending on the operation means operated according to the mode of the operation promotion display. For this reason, the operation according to the operation promotion display can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
The operation promotion display means executes the operation promotion display so that the proportion controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when executed is higher in the second mode than in the first mode ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 31 (B) and 31 (C), the mode of the operation promoting display of the button cut-in notice effect is executed rather than when the mode of the operation promoting display of the button serif preview effect is performed. The rate at which the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher.

  According to such a configuration, the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the operation prompting display of the second aspect is executed than in the first aspect. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation promotion display, and the operation according to the operation promotion display can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The first operation means can be changed from the normal mode to the specific mode (for example, the shape, the pattern, the color, or the like can be changed such that the push button 120 pops out),
When the first operation means is in the specific mode, the effect execution means does not determine the operation of the second operation means as an effective determination (for example, for the operation of the second operation means, the operation of the second operation means The same effect as the effect for the operation may not be performed, or any effect may not be performed, and the operation is invalid as shown in step S8149 of FIG. 35 and FIG. 39 (D). You may perform the production | presentation which notifies that.).

  According to such a configuration, when the first operation means is in the specific mode, the same effect as the effect for the operation of the first operation means is not executed even when the second operation means is operated. Therefore, the operation of the first operation means can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
An instruction display means capable of displaying an explanation to the effect that the operation of the second operation means is determined to be effective when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in step S8125, FIG. 38 (B) and the like, it is displayed that the operation of the other operation unit is effective.

  According to such a configuration, the player is easily informed that the determination is made effective even when the second operation means is operated when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from wondering which operation means to operate.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The information processing apparatus further includes indication display means capable of displaying an indication that the operation of the second operation means is not regarded as effective determination when the operation promotion display of the first operation means is the second mode (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in step S8139A and FIG. 39 (B), it displays that the operation of the other operation unit is invalid.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player that when the second operation means is operated when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, it is not determined as an effective determination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the second operating means in anticipation that the same effect as when the first operating means is operated is performed without the player being aware.

Modification of First Embodiment
The modification of embodiment mentioned above below is shown.

  (1) In the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a gaming machine different from the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a slot machine, as described above, the first operating means, the second operating means, the operation promoting display means, and the effect executing means And the effect execution means determines the operation of the second operation means with respect to the first mode as the effective determination when the operation promotion display of the first operation means is the first mode, but the operation of the first operation means When the prompting display is the second mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the second mode may not be determined as the valid determination.

  In this case, the first operation means is, for example, an operation unit similar to the push button 120 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and the second operation means is, for example, a BET button or start lever different from the push button 120 Another operation unit such as a stop button. The operation promotion display means, for example, performs the operation promotion display at the timing when the rotation of the symbol is not started by the freeze effect being executed after the start lever is operated, or at the timing until the first stop of the symbol. It is possible to display in one mode or the second mode, and the effect execution means is, for example, the timing after the rotation of the symbol is started after the freeze effect, or the timing until the third stop of the symbol (the last symbol is stopped) The effect can be performed when the first operation means or the second operation means is operated based on the execution of the operation prompting display.

  (2) In the embodiment described above, the first operation means is the push button 120, and the second operation means is the trigger button 121 and the stick controller 122 which are operation units different from the push button 120. However, the present invention is not limited to this as long as the first operation means and the second operation means are different operation parts. For example, conversely, the second operation means may be the push button 120, and the first operation means may be the trigger button 121 and the stick controller 122. Further, the first operation means may be an operation unit which is more difficult for the player to operate than the second operation means. Also, conversely, the first operation means may be an operation unit that is easier for the player to operate than the second operation means.

  (3) In the embodiment described above, in the operation prompting display, the first aspect of the aspect imitating the appearance of the state in which the push button 120 is not jumping out, and the appearance of the state in which the push button 120 is jumping out There are two aspects of the second aspect of the aspect that imitates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting display may have two or more modes. For example, the aspect A imitating the appearance of the most popping out state of the push button out of a plurality of steps, the popping out in the middle of the state in which the push button is out of a plurality of steps The mode B simulating the appearance of the state and the mode C simulating the appearance of the state in which the push button 120 is not popped out may be in the operation promotion display.

  In this case, when the operation promotion display of the specific operation means is modes B and C, the operation of the operation unit other than the specific operation means is determined to be valid, and when the operation promotion display of the specific operation means is mode A, An operation of an operation unit other than the specific operation unit may not be determined as valid. Moreover, when the operation promotion display of the specific operation means is the mode C, the operation of the operation unit other than the specific operation means is determined to be effective, and when the operation promotion display of the specific operation means is the modes A and B, the specific operation The operation of the operation unit other than the means may not be determined as the valid determination.

  (4) In the embodiment described above, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode, it is determined that the operation of the second operation means is valid as shown in step S8128 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 38F, when the operation prompting image of the push button 120 is in the first mode in which the display is not jumping out, the button serif notice for the push button 120 is also notified for operations other than the push button 120. The effect of the same effect aspect as the first effect aspect and the second effect aspect of the effect image is to be executed. That is, in order to determine that the operation of the second operation means is valid, the effect of the same effect mode as the effect for the operation of the first operation means is executed in response to the operation of the second operation means.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effective determination of the operation of the second operation means is the same character as the effect for the operation of the first operation means, even for the operation of the second operation means, May be performed. Also for the operation of the second operation means, an effect indicating that the character is speaking a serif having the same semantic content as the effect for the operation of the first operation means may be executed. Also for the operation of the second operation means, performing the same type of effect such as the effect for the operation of the first operation means and the effect of the same degree of expectation such as 50% or more of the big hit expectation degree. It may be Also for the operation of the second operation means, an effect associated with the effect for the operation of the first operation means, for example, a premium effect is executed for one operation and an associated non-premium effect for the other operation May be performed.

  (5) In the embodiment described above, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is in the second mode, the operation of the second operation means is not regarded as an effective determination, as shown in step S8149 of FIG. As shown in), when the operation promoting image of the push button 120 is the second mode in which the pop-up display is performed, an effect of notifying that the operation other than the push button 120 is invalid is executed. That is, not performing effective determination of the operation of the second operation means does not execute the same effect as the effect for the operation of the first operation means with respect to the operation of the second operation means.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured that no effect is executed for the operation of the second operation means not to effectively determine the operation of the second operation means. In this case, the displayed operation prompting is not erased if it is within the effective period of the operation.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is in the first mode, the operation of the second operation means for the first mode is regarded as effective determination in step S8129 in FIG. As shown, the operation prompting display is erased according to the operation. On the other hand, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the second mode is not regarded as an effective determination, and as described in step S8149 of FIG. The operation prompting display was not erased accordingly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the operation promotion display of the first operation means is the second mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the second mode is not regarded as an effective determination, and the operation promotion display according to the operation May be deleted.

  (7) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 31 (B) and 31 (C), the button cut-in notice effect is more effective than when the operation promoting display mode of the button serif notice effect is executed. The percentage of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher when the operation promotion display mode is executed. That is, the proportion controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when executed is the second mode (button cut) than the first mode (the mode of the operation promotion display of the button serif announcement effect) The operation promotion display is performed so that the mode of the operation promotion display of the in advance notice effect is higher. When the rate at which the operation prompting display is executed in such an advantageous manner is high, the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is also high.

  In the embodiment described above, the operation promotion display is executed in the first mode when the operation promotion display is executed in the second mode which urges the player to perform the operation more strongly than the first mode. Rather, it is determined that the rate at which the player is controlled to the advantageous state is higher. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the operation prompting display is executed in the second mode is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player than when the operation prompting display is executed in the first mode. The ratio may be low.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, it is possible to change from the normal mode in which the push button 120, which is the first operation means, does not fly out, to the specific mode in which it pops out. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape, pattern or color of the first operation means or the combination thereof may be changeable from the normal mode to the specific mode. For example, when the lamp is provided inside the first operating means and the color of the first operating means is changed by the light emission of the lamp, the normal mode is white, and the specific mode is It may be red or iridescent.

  (9) In the embodiment described above, when the first operation means is in the specific mode, it is shown in step S8149 of FIG. 35 and FIG. 39 (D) that the operation of the second operation means is not determined as valid. As described above, when it is a specific mode in which the push button 120 jumps out, an effect of notifying that an operation other than the push button 120 is invalid is executed. That is, not performing effective determination of the operation of the second operation means does not execute the same effect as the effect for the operation of the first operation means with respect to the operation of the second operation means.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured that no effect is executed for the operation of the second operation means not to effectively determine the operation of the second operation means.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, as shown in step S8125 of FIG. 34, FIG. 38 (B) and the like, as part of the explanation effect during the change display of the effect pattern, and the operation promotion display When the operation prompting display of the button 120 is not popped out, it is displayed that the operation of the other operation unit is effective.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the operation prompting display is not executed, the operation prompting display of the push button 120 is a push button as an explanatory effect in the variable display of the effect pattern (for example, before reaching the reach state). When the mode 120 does not fly out, it may be displayed that the operation of the other operation unit is effective.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, as shown in step S8139A of FIG. 36 and FIG. 39 (B), the push button is used as a part of the explanation effect during the change display of the effect pattern and the operation promotion display. When the operation prompting display 120 is in a mode in which the push button 120 is jumping out, it is displayed that the operation of the other operation unit is invalid.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the operation prompting display is not executed, the operation prompting display of the push button 120 is a push button as an explanatory effect in the variable display of the effect pattern (for example, before reaching the reach state). When the mode 120 is jumping out, it may be displayed that the operation of the other operation unit is invalid.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the first mode is regarded as the effective determination, but the first operation means When the operation prompting display of the second aspect is the second aspect, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the second aspect is not regarded as the valid determination.

  However, when the operation promotion display of the second operation means is the first mode, the operation of the first operation means with respect to the first mode is determined to be effective, but the operation promotion display of the second operation means is the second mode In some cases, the operation of the first operation means with respect to the second aspect may not be determined as a valid determination.

  (13) In the embodiment described above, the operation prompting display of the first aspect and the second aspect is executable at different timings. Specifically, the operation promotion display of the first aspect can be executed at the timing when the button serif announcement effect is executed, and the operation promotion display of the second mode is executed at the timing when the button cut-in announcement effect is executed It was possible.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting display of the first aspect and the second aspect may be executable in the same effect. For example, in a certain advance notice effect (for example, a button cut-in notice effect), the operation promotion display of the second mode is executed at a higher rate than the first mode, in order to set an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Good. Also, conversely, in a certain advance notice effect, the operation promotion display of the first aspect may be executed at a higher rate than the second aspect, in order to set an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  (14) In the embodiment described above, the effectiveness of the automatic operation function in which it is considered that the operation prompted by the operation prompting display is automatically executed even if the operation prompting display is not performed on the operation unit. And, the player may be configured to be able to set the invalidation.

  Even when such an automatic operation function is set to be effective, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, it is determined that the operation of the second operation means for the second mode is effective. Alternatively, the operation considered to be automatically executed by the automatic operation function may not be determined as the valid determination. For example, when the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, the automatic operation function may be invalidated even if it is set to be effective.

  (15) In the embodiment described above, the detection effective period display (for example, the remaining effective period image 202 shown in FIG. 38 (B), FIG. 39 (B), etc.) is the operation of the first aspect and the second aspect It was decided to be the same size for any of the promptings. However, the present invention is not limited to this, so that a small detection effective period display is performed when executing the operation prompting display of the first aspect, and a large detection effective period display is executed when executing the operation prompting display of the second aspect. You may Also, conversely, when executing the operation prompting display of the first aspect, a large detection effective period display is executed, and when executing the operation prompting display of the second aspect, a small detection effective period display is executed. Good. When the same period is indicated, the speed of subtraction of the large detection effective period display may be made faster or slower than the small detection effective period display. As a result, the speed of subtraction varies depending on the size of the detection effective period display, so that the player can be focused on the detection effective period display.

  (16) The configuration described in the above-described embodiment can also be applied to a gaming system called a so-called portable interlocking system. In general, a gaming system called a mobile interlocking system is a gaming machine that outputs predetermined information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a predetermined benefit for the player based on predetermined information output by the gaming machine. And a privilege giving device for performing a process of giving.

  Specifically, in the gaming system as described above, the gaming machine plays predetermined conditions such as the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of so-called consecutive villas (the number of big hits in a definite change state ongoing), and the number of mission achievements. It accumulates as a history and displays a two-dimensional code etc. as predetermined information at the end of the game. In addition, the player captures a two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine using a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function, and transmits it to a Web server (a privilege giving device) on the Internet. Then, the Web server manages the game history of the player based on the received information, and performs a process of providing a predetermined benefit according to the game history. For example, the Web server transmits digital content such as image content and music content to the player's portable terminal as a predetermined benefit, or transmits a predetermined password to the player's portable terminal, and the player next time When playing a game, processing is performed to enable customization of the display screen of the gaming machine according to the preference of the player.

  When the configuration described in the above embodiment is applied to a game system as described above, for example, the execution of the button cut-in notice effect of the second effect mode and the big hit is regarded as the establishment of the predetermined condition. The number of times may be managed by the Web server as a game history. Then, according to the number of times the button cut-in notice effect of the second effect mode is executed and a big hit is made, digital content may be transmitted as a predetermined privilege, or the display screen of the gaming machine may be customized. .

  (17) In the embodiment described above, when the variation control is started to notify the microcomputer for effect control 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo sequence. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, “the proportions are different” means that the proportions are different only in a relation such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the like is also a concept including ones with different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  (19) In the embodiment described above, the presentation control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as substrates on which the circuit for controlling the presentation device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the presentation device May be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 etc. and a circuit equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27 etc.) Two substrates with two effect control substrates may be provided.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, as shown in FIG. Sound / lamp board) having a function by the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70 or the sound output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 4 and a function by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35 The effect control command may be transmitted, and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, the game machine uses game media as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a premium of a predetermined number, The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type game machine which seals game media such as balls and gives a score when a prize giving condition is established.

  (22) In the embodiment described above, the gaming machine is shown to be controlled to a definite change state after the end of the big hit game based on the fact that there is a definite variation big hit or normal big hit as a big hit classification and a definite variation big hit as a big hit classification. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a positive change state after completion.

  (23) In the embodiment described above, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” and deriving and displaying the display result is shown, but such variable display is such It is not limited to the form. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived need not necessarily be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  (24) In addition to the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit will be made, and determines whether or not a variation pattern type will be winning (prefetch determination), and indicates the winning determination result A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted, and the preview control notice may be executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the command indicating the result of the winning determination. In addition, for example, it may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination) on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control transmits a command specifying only the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) or the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the occurrence of the start winning. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform the winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on the value of the random number designated by the command.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 40 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment as viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 122 capable of holding and tilting in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, the player holds the operating stick of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand), and performs predetermined operations by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, forefinger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 42) capable of instructing operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 42) for detecting a predetermined instructing operation by pushing or pulling the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation stick of the stick controller 122. 42) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 42) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the lower main body inside the lower portion of the stick controller 122 or the like. Also, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 42) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing the predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 42) for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 40, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in the vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower dishes. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be shifted to either the left or the right in the upper and lower plates while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, and may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. There are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the variation display of the effect design is performed as the effect of the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story property may be executed, and an effect such as displaying the result of the story based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern may be performed. For example, a battle wrestling, a soccer game, and a battle game in which an enemy ally character fights are performed, and if it is a big hit, a game or battle is won, and if it is out, a game or battle is defeated. It is also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be performed such that a predetermined story such as a story is sequentially developed.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided which display a fourth symbol following the effect symbol, the special symbol to be described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (but, correctly, the variation display of the presentation symbol changes on the microcomputer 100 side for presentation control) It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the rendering using the rendering display 9, for example, the content of the rendering including the fluctuation display of the rendering pattern disappears from the screen for a moment Effects are being diversified, such as effects being performed, and effects such as moving objects blocking all or part of the screen being performed. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not the state is currently in the state of fluctuating display. So, in this embodiment, by performing the variation display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, is the state of the present variation display now by confirming the state of the fourth symbol? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. In addition, since the 4th design is always changed and displayed in a fixed operation, and it does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, it can always be viewed.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be generically referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  Variation of the fourth symbol (variable display) is realized by continuing turning on and off of the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d with a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at predetermined time intervals. . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, it is displayed in a display color (a display color different from the disappointing color) that evokes a big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Ru. For example, it is displayed in blue when it is out of place but in red when it is a big hit. Note that the display color may be made different according to the type of the big hit (whether it is a definite variation big hit or a normal big hit). In addition, the display color may be made different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win the game ball to the big winning opening, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hit with different number of rounds, the big hit The display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the game. In addition, even if the number of rounds for each big hit is the same, for example, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is short (for example 1 second), the big hitting which can not expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening substantially And, when the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening substantially, it is substantially to the big winning opening The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the winning of the game ball can be expected. In addition, for example, when there is a big hit that can be expected as a big hit that can be expected to be a game ball to the big winning opening by the difference in the number of opening of the big winning opening per round The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win in the mouth.

  In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, it is displayed in a display color (a display color different from the disappointing color) that evokes a big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Ru. For example, it is displayed in blue when it is out of place but in red when it is a big hit. Note that the display color may be made different according to the type of the big hit (whether it is a definite variation big hit or a normal big hit). In addition, the display color may be made different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win the game ball to the big winning opening, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hit with different number of rounds, the big hit The display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the game. In addition, even if the number of rounds for each big hit is the same, for example, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is short (for example 1 second), the big hitting which can not expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening substantially And, when the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening substantially, it is substantially to the big winning opening The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the winning of the game ball can be expected. In addition, for example, when there is a big hit that can be expected as a big hit that can be expected to be a game ball to the big winning opening by the difference in the number of opening of the big winning opening per round The display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win in the mouth.

  The display color when the fourth symbol display area 9c, 9d is turned off is a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display image from being disintegrated with the background image when the light is turned off. It is desirable to have.

  In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area is provided in part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, but separately from the effect display device 9, a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which two LEDs are alternately lit, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be displayed whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided respectively corresponding to the separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d is shown, the first special symbol and the second special are illustrated. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided on part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, the fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized using a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as repeating display and display of different display colors at predetermined time intervals. Also, for example, when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and when performing the fluctuation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, for example The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such as turning on and off repeatedly at different time intervals. Also, for example, the same big hit symbol is used for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and for deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, stop symbols of different modes may be stopped and displayed.

  On the right of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Also, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a) Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable indicator) There is something to do.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14. And although the first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display 9, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 9 and the first start winning opening 13 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange nails closely around 13 and to make it difficult to guide the game balls to the first start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13, so that the winning ratio of the second start winning opening 14 You may make it be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided to open and close only to the second start winning opening 14, but the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 13 are provided. The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball device that performs opening and closing operations is provided for any of the start winning openings 14.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol suspension storage indicator 18b, the number of activated winning balls entering the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first suspension storage number (pending storage is also referred to as start storage or start prize storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a first hold storage display unit 18c for displaying the first hold storage count and a second hold storage display unit 18d for displaying the second hold storage count are provided. ing. In addition, an area (summed pending storage display unit) may be provided to display the total number (total pending memory number) which is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. As described above, by providing the combined hold storage display unit for displaying the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect design as a symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40, a special variable winning ball device 20 forming a large winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning prize ball device 20 is provided with an open / close plate and specified when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. It is controlled to the gaming state. The specific display result is a predetermined display result, and in this embodiment, for example, there is a jackpot symbol. The specific game state is to change the variable winning means capable of changing to the first state advantageous to the player and the second state disadvantageous to the player to the first state, and in this embodiment, the open state There is a big hit game state which makes the special variable winning prize ball device 20 which can change into the closed state and the open state. For example, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the specific display result, the jackpot game state is controlled as the specific gaming state. In each specific gaming state, the open / close version being in the closed state is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display, for example, the numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols). Also, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED etc., for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "o" and "x") May be composed of

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a hit symbol, for example, a symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the variation display of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) In this case, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be hit symbols is increased, and there may be a transition to a high base state in which the opening time and opening number of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 2 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the 15R probability variation big hit or the 4R probability variation big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the high probability state, and the game ball becomes easy to start winning (that is, the special symbol indicator 8a, 8b or It shifts to the high base state which is a gaming state controlled so that execution conditions of variable display in effect display device 9 are easily satisfied). In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a short time state (special symbol time short state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of invalid start winnings as the frequency at which the variation of the effect pattern starts is increased (in other words, the reserve memory is quickly stored). Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 41 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created in the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as a special symbol process flag or a probability change flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 503 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560) The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for giving detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the main circuit board is also a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output of

  FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 42, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as an effect pattern process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect pattern). Further, when the voice synthesis IC 703 receives a predetermined request from the effect control board 80, the voice synthesis IC 703 generates a voice and outputs the voice to the speaker 27.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to power supply to the game machine being started and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes security check processing, which is processing for confirming whether the content of the program is valid or not. , The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode of the maskable interrupt is set (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of microcomputer 560 for gaming control and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode that indicates the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter on the stack.

  Next, setting (initialization) of the built-in device register is performed (step S4). By the process of step S4, setting (initialization) of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) as built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) is performed.

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the RAM 55 to an accessible state (step S5), and shifts to a clear signal check process.

  Note that software delay processing may be executed to delay the start timing of the gaming apparatus control processing (game control processing) for controlling the progress of the game by software. Such software delay processing can delay the start timing of the game control processing as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not performed. When delay processing is performed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board can not receive the command transmitted by the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37) Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the clear switch is turned on (step S6). The CPU 56 may check the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may check the state of the clear signal multiple times. For example, when it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is in the off state, the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed after delaying a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds). If it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. At this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is in the off state, the state of the clear signal may be reconfirmed again after setting a delay time of a predetermined time. Here, the number of reconfirmation is not limited to one or two, and may be three or more. Alternatively, the check may be made twice, and when the check results do not match, it may be confirmed again.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S6, whether or not the data protection process (for example, power supply stop process such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It confirms (step S7). In this embodiment, processing for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed when the power supply is stopped. If it is confirmed that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of the power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes the initialization processing.

  Whether or not the power supply stop processing has been performed is a value corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop processing (for example, 2). It is confirmed by whether it is). Note that the way of such confirmation is an example, and for example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop processing has been performed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop processing, and the flag is set in step S7. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop processing has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping the power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. In addition, the number of times of checksum calculation corresponding to the number of data to be checked is set. Then, an exclusive OR operation is performed on the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer. While storing the operation result in the checksum data area, the value of the pointer is increased by 1 and the value of the checksum calculation number is decremented by 1. The above process is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area, and uses the data after the inversion as a checksum.

  In the power supply stop processing, the checksum is calculated by the same processing as the above processing, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S13B) executed at the time of power on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs gaming state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of the power supply stop. Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is stored (output port buffer), not yet It is a portion where data indicating the payout prize number of balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the top address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S42A). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a random symbol counter for normal symbol determination, a buffer for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize symbol flag, an out-of-prize flag, etc. The initial value is set to the flag for performing.

  The CPU 56 sets the start address of the command transmission table for initialization stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13A), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the content to the sub board The process is executed (step S13B). As the initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14).

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) Step S15). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the setting of the timer interrupt is completed, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt disable state (step S16), executes the initial value random number update process (step S17A) and the display random number update process (step S18A). The interrupt permission state is set again (step S19). That is, when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, the CPU 56 is in the interrupt prohibition state, and when the execution of the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process is completed Make it

  The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determination to determine the type of the big hit (for example, the big hit symbol determination random number for determining the special symbol that generates the big hit, and whether to shift the gaming state to a definite variation state Initial value of count value such as random number for probability variation decision to be used, counter for generating normal pattern hit judgment random number to decide whether to generate hit based on normal pattern etc. It is a random number to determine the value. Game control processing (processing for controlling the gaming devices such as the effect display device 9, the variable winning ball device 15, the ball payout device 97 and the like provided to the gaming machine by the gaming control microcomputer) In the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer (also referred to as gaming device control process), when the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one revolution, an initial value is set to the counter.

  Further, the display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display 8. In this embodiment, as a display random number, a variation pattern determination random number for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, and a reach determination random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated. Used. The display random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  Further, it is also executed in the timer interrupt process that the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are described later (that is, the timer is in an interrupt-prohibited state when the display random number update process is executed). Since the same process is executed in steps S9026 and S9027 of the interrupt process, the conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process is avoided. That is, if the timer interruption occurs during the processing of steps S17A and S18A and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interruption processing, the count is counted. The continuity of the values may be lost. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt disable state is set during the processing of steps S17A and S18A.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. Specifically, during the execution of the main processing, when a timer interrupt occurs during a period in which the interrupt processing is permitted during the execution of the loop processing of steps S16 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 Execute timer interrupt processing which is started in response to the occurrence of timer interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-down process (power-down detection process) for detecting whether or not the power-down signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S9020). The CPU 56 receives detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 58, and detects the input of each switch. (Switch processing: step S9021). Specifically, if the state of the input port to which the detection signal of each switch is input is the on state, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for controlling the display of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage indicator 18, and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 (step S9022). With regard to the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control is performed to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S9036 and S9037.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning notification process for detecting an occurrence of an abnormal winning on the special winning opening and notifying an abnormality (step S9024).

  After step S9024, the CPU 56 performs processing for updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S9025 ). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S9026). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S9027).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S9028). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is selected and executed in accordance with the special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. And, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each processing according to the gaming state. Also, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S9029). In the normal symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting, to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, an effect control command regarding an effect pattern synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol (effect symbol command control process: step S9030). In addition, that the fluctuation of a production | presentation pattern synchronizes with the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol means that the fluctuation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs an information output process to output data such as a starting opening signal supplied to a hole management computer, 1 signal of symbol determination number, 2 signals of symbol determination number, 1 to 3 signals of big hit, and a short time signal etc. (Step S9031).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes an award ball process for setting the number of award balls based on detection signals of the first start opening switch 13a, the second start opening switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S9032). Specifically, the payout control micro-circuit mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In addition, test terminal processing, which is processing for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S9033). Further, in this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents regarding the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 0 to the output port (Step S9034: output processing). Then, the CPU 56 executes a storage process of checking whether the number of pending storages increases or decreases (step S9035).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S9036). Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S9037).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a status indicator display process of setting status display control data for displaying each status indicator in the output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S9038). In this case, when the gaming state is also controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probability change state), state display control data for displaying a state indicator light indicating that the state is a high probability state is set in the output buffer You may do it.

Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S9039), and the process ends.
By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9039 (except for steps S9031 and 9033) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be performed in

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined rendering symbols that do not reach will be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") when the variable display result is a lost design.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach") when the variable display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Finally, in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are aligned and stop-displayed.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 45, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA-1 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the rendering symbol is "non-reach". The fluctuation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect pattern is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 The variation patterns of Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-2 and Super PB 3-1 to Super PB 3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 45, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-4 that is used when non-reaching and that is accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream. In the case of using the normal PB2-1 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and which are accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-2 used when not reaching is a fluctuation pattern for shortening fluctuation, and fluctuation time of the production design is shortened to a short time (in this example, 3.0 seconds) . Moreover, when using normal PB2-2 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is to execute the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 45, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol, normal PA 2-3 to normal PA 2-4, normal PB 2-3 to normal Variation patterns of PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, and super PB3-3 to super PB3-4 are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45, in the case of using the normal PB 2-3 among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo ream, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-4 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the fluctuation time is fixedly determined in accordance with the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo link, the fluctuation time is 32). Fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo run, the variation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds), but even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, for example The fluctuation time may be varied according to the total number of pending storages. For example, even with the same type of super reach, as the total number of pending storages increases, the variation time may be shortened. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, in the case of performing variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the first number of pending storage, (2) In the case of performing variable display of a special symbol, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of pending storages. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3, 4 It is also possible to prepare a variation pattern type determination table for use), select the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number, and make the variation time different.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory view of each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit mentioned later, 4R probability variation big hit) (for big hit classification judgment)
(2) Random 2 (MR 2): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the random 4 initial value)
In this embodiment, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and determines the variation using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) It is determined to be one of the variation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the features of the variation modes. For example, a plurality of change patterns are grouped by reach type, and a change pattern type including a change pattern with normal reach, a change pattern type including a change pattern with super reach A, and a change pattern with super reach B It may be divided into the variation pattern type. Also, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations in the pseudo sequence, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern not accompanied by a pseudo sequence, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, and It may be divided into a variation pattern type including two variation patterns and a variation pattern type including three variation patterns. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped by the presence or absence of specific effects such as pseudo-runs and slip effects.

  In step S9025 in the game control process shown in FIG. 44, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number of (1) and the random number per normal symbol determination of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram of a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal time big hit determination table used in a normal state (that is, a gaming state which is not a definite change state) and a positive change time big hit determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 47 (A) is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 47 (A) is the jackpot determination value.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If it matches with any of the big hit judgment value, it decides to make it a big hit (15R positive variation big hit, 4R positive variation big hit which will be described later) regarding the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 47A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol.

  FIGS. 47B and 47C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131 c and 131 d stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 47 (B) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 c of the case. Further, FIG. 47C shows the case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131 d.

  When it is determined that the variable display result is to be a big hit symbol, the big hit type determination table 131c, 131d is based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, "15 R probability variation big hit", It is a table referred to in order to decide either of “4R probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 (B) and (C), ten judgment values are assigned to “15R probability variation big hit” in big hit type determination table 131 c (40 minutes 30 judgment values are assigned to the “15R probability variation big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131d while the 15R probability variation big hit is determined by the ratio of 10) (ratio of 30/40 The case where it is determined that the 15R probability variation is a big hit) will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second start winning opening 14 is started with a second special symbol, rather than when the first start winning opening 13 is subjected to a start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed. In the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the “15R probability variation big hit” is determined is higher.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 (B) and (C), there are "15R positive variation big hit" and "4R positive variation big hit" as the big hit types. In this embodiment, although the case where the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 4 rounds is shown, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to For example, a 10R probability variation big hit to control 10 rounds of big hit games, a 7R probability variation big hit to control 7 rounds of big hit games, a 5R probability variation big hit to control 5 rounds of big hit games may be provided. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the big hit classification is two types of “15R positive variation big hit” and “4R positive variation big hit” is shown, it is not limited to two types, for example, three or more big hit categories are provided You may do so. Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than two types, for example, only one type may be provided as the jackpot type.

  "15R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that controls 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a definite change state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, it is shifted to a positive change state and a short time state Is also migrated.). Then, the probability change state and the time saving state continue until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times). Hereinafter, the gaming state controlled to the definite variation state and the short time state may be referred to as "high probability high base state", and the state not controlled to any of the definite variation state and the short time state may be referred to as "low probability low base state" .

  "4R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that controls to 4 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to the positive changing state after the big hitting gaming state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to the positive changing state and to the time saving state Is also migrated.). Then, the probability change state and the time saving state continue until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

  In jackpot type judgment tables 131c and 131d, judgment values (big hit type judgment values) corresponding to “15R probability variation big hit” and “4R probability variation big hit” are set, respectively. ing. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIGS. 48 and 49 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol that is variably displayed on the staging display device 9 corresponding to a variable display of a special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation commands: fan fare designation commands) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, the start of the big hit game. In this embodiment, either the jackpot start 1 designated command or the jackpot start 2 designated command is used according to the type of the jackpot. Specifically, the jackpot start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "15R probability variation big hit", and the jackpot start 2 designation command (A002 (H) in the case of "4R probability variation big hit" Is used.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set to the EXT data and transmitted for the special winning opening open designation command, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted after the special winning opening open command, a different special winning opening after opening specification command is transmitted every round.

  Command A 301 (H), A 302 (H) is to display the big hit end screen, that is, a presentation control command to specify the end of the big hit game (big hit 1 specified command: ending 1 specified command, big hit completed 2 specified command: ending 2) specified command). The big hit end 1 specified command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “15R certainty big hit” is finished. The big hit end 2 designated command (A 302 (H)) is used when the big hit game due to “4R probability variation big hit” is finished.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designating command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (probable variation state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the definite variation state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number addition designation command) for specifying that the second pending storage number has increased by one. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has decreased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second pending storage number has decreased by one.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Do.

  For example, microcomputer 560 for game control designates the fluctuation pattern of the production design every time there is a starting winning and variable display of special symbols is started in first special symbol display 8a or second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31 via the relay substrate 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8a in a variable display (variation) of the effect design corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the second special It can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the production symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the symbol display 8b, and the production display which performs the production with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the rendering components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the rendering control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S9026) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 56 detects that the game ball has won the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13, or the second start winning opening 14 If the second start opening switch 14a for turning on is turned on, that is, if the start winning combination to the first start winning opening 13 or the start winning combination to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the start opening switch passing processing The process is executed (steps S9311 and S9312). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S307 is performed. If the first start winning hole switch 13a or the second start hole switch 14a is not turned on, one of the steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

The process of steps S300 to S307 is the following process.
Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the number of held memories buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, start the fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the fourth symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. The data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing of step S9022 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. Control for transmitting the effect control command of round display in the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, processing for confirming establishment of closing condition of the big winning opening, and the like are performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to step S307.

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Further, a process of setting a flag (for example, a positive change flag) indicating the gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of step S9312. In the starting opening switch passing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the on state, the process proceeds to step S1217. If the first starting port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first pending storage for counting the first number of pending storages Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1217.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1213) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 52) (step S1215). . In the process of step S1215, hardware R is a random R (big hit determination random number), a software random number is a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. The random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2) and the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) are not extracted in the start opening switch passage process (at the time of start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, (1) It may be extracted at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. For example, in the variation pattern setting process described later, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts the value from the variation pattern type determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), or the variation pattern The value may be directly extracted from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the determination random number (random 3).

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of an area (pending buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 52, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer may be hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1216).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the second start port switch 14a is in the on state (step S1217). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending storage for counting the second number of pending storages) Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S1218). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1219), and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1220). Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 52) (step S1221). . In the process of step S1221, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. The variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) is not extracted in the start opening switch passage process (at start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the second special symbol. May be For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S222).

  FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, if the customer waiting demo specification command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demonstration specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51B), and the process is performed. finish. For example, when transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command in step S51B, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration specification command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption after transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command, the customer waiting demonstration instruction command completed flag is set and the customer waiting is repeated. Control may be performed so as not to send a demo specification command. Also, in this case, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag may be reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second number of pending storages is 0 (step S52A). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage number counter is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step S53). If the second pending storage number is 0 (ie, only the first pending storage number has been accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processes of steps S52A to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled to be established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variation display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the random numbers stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage number buffer. Then, it is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and each storage area in the first pending storage number buffer Shift the content of When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "first", the CPU 56 is a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage number buffer of the RAM 55 Each random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a definite change state background designation command when a positive change flag indicating that the change is in the positive change state is set. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a normal state background designation command if the probability change flag is not set.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the background designation command is transmitted each time for each change, but, for example, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has changed from the time of the previous change at the start of the change, Only when the state changes, a background designation command corresponding to the changed gaming state may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the number of times of transmission of the background designation command can be reduced, and the processing load on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect symbol command control process (step S9030). In this embodiment, when starting to change the special symbol, the microcomputer for effect control is in the order of background designation command, fluctuation pattern command, display result designation command, and pending storage number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. It will be sent to 100. Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the background designation command is sent, the variation pattern command is sent after 4 ms, the display result designation command is sent after 4 ms, and after 4 ms, A pending storage count subtraction specification command is sent. In addition, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the symbol variation specification command (1st symbol variation specification command, 2nd symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command Are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S307 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in step S1215 and S1221 of the starting opening switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the big hit judgment. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes processing for comparing a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 47) determined in advance with the jackpot determination random number and determining that a jackpot will occur if they match. That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the non-probable change state (normal game state). Specifically, the probability variation time big hit determination table (the table in the ROM 54 in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 47A is set) in which the number of big hit determination values is set in advance is large A normal-time jackpot judgment table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 47A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the jackpot judgment table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When in the gaming state, processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at normal times. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 47A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be 15R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit, is set in the processing to end the big hit game, and when it is determined to be a big hit, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the stop symbol is stopped It is reset at the timing to finish or the variation display of 50 special symbols.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131c for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 47 (B). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131d for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 47 (C).

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“15R probability variation big hit”, “15 R probability variation big hit,” corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. The 4R probability variation big hit ") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot type determination random number extracted in step S1215 or S1221 of the starting opening switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer to determine the big hit type. .

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, if the big hit type is "15R certainty big hit", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and if the big hit type is "4R certainty big hit", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type Be done.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, the symbol "-" which is an out symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, either of the big hit symbols is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, "7" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be "15R probability variation big hit", and "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is decided to be "4R probability variation big hit".

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to what has been shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types according to the jackpot type. Is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the positive change flag indicating that it is a positive change state is set (step S93A). The definite change flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the definite change state, and is reset when the definite change state is ended. Specifically, it is determined to be 15R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit, is set in the processing to end the big hit game, and when it is determined to be a big hit, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the stop symbol is stopped It is reset at the timing when or 50 times of variable display ends. If the probability change flag is set (Y in step S93A), the CPU 56 uses the probability variation change pattern type determination table for probability change as a table used to determine the change pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. It selects (step S99A). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the probability change flag is not set (N in step S93A), the CPU 56 confirms whether the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the normal fluctuation pattern classification determination table as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. Is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 is a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types, and is used for removal at the time of variation time reduction A variation pattern type determination table is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S93A to S98, the variation pattern type determination table for loss time reduction is selected. When the gaming state is a definite change state, a change pattern type determination table for positive change is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the change pattern type in the process of step S100 described later, and when the change pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the change is performed in step S101. As the pattern, non-reach PA-1 of shortening variation is determined. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state or the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed.

  Although in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of pending storages are different tables, the shortening is described. A common table may be used as the fluctuation pattern type determination table for fluctuation.

  In addition, even when the gaming state is a definite change state, when the total number of pending storages is approximately 0 (for example, 0 or 0 or 1), the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation is performed You may not do this. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S93A, the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is approximately 0 or not, and if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0, the variation pattern type for loss The determination table may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of steps S92, S83, S99A, S97 or S98. The variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S100). In addition, when it is configured not to extract random 2 (random pattern type determination random number) at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 56 performs the variation pattern type determination for generating the random pattern type determination random number (random 2). The value may be directly extracted from the random number counter, and the variation pattern type may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100, as a table used to determine the variation pattern determination table. One of them is selected (step S101). Also, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserve storage buffer or the second reserve storage buffer), the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, it may be determined first whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, instead of suddenly determining the type of change pattern. Then, based on the determination result of whether or not to reach, the processes of steps S93A to S98 and S100 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result, The variation pattern type may be determined.

  Further, when it is determined whether or not reach is determined by lottery processing using random numbers for reach determination, the number of reach may be determined according to the total number of pending storages (which may be the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number). A reach determination table with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not the reach probability is lowered as the number of pending storage increases.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 controls to transmit one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 3 designation effect control command (see FIG. 48) according to the determined type of big hit and removal. Do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, when the type of big hit is “15R certainty big hit”, control to transmit the display result 2 specified command is performed (steps S111A and S112). In addition, it is specifically judged by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S 74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01” or not whether it is “15 R certainty big hit” or not. it can. Further, when the type of the big hit is “4R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S111A and S114). In addition, it is specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not whether it is "4R probability variation big hit" or not. it can.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), that is, when the big hit flag is off, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S9131). When the jackpot flag is set, if it is set, the CPU 56 resets the positive change flag indicating that it is a positive change state (step S9132).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S9133). Specifically, when the type of the big hit is a 15R probability variation big hit, the big hit start 1 designated command is transmitted. When the type of the big hit is 4R probability variation big hit, it sends the big hit start 2 specified command. It should be noted that whether the type of big hit is 15R certainty big hit or 4R certain big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  In addition, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) in the big winning opening pre-opening timer (step S9134). The big winning opening pre-opening timer is a timer for measuring the time until the big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. Specifically, at the start of the big hit game, in step S9134, the time required from the time when the variable display is stopped to the time the first round is started (the variable display is stopped on the effect control microcomputer 100 side and the big hit symbol is The time corresponding to the time for performing fanfare effect from the stop display to the start of the first round) is set as the timer before the opening of the special winning opening. Further, for the first and subsequent rounds, an interval time between the rounds (a device for performing an interval effect between rounds on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100) is set as the big winning opening opening pre-opening timer.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the number of times of release according to the big hit type in the number of times of release counter (step S9135). For example, if the 15R probability variation big hit is set to 15 times, if the 4R probability variation big hit is set to 4 times the opening frequency counter.

  Then, CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S9137).

  Also, if the big hit flag is not set in step S9131, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the probability change flag is set (step S9141), and if it is not set, that is, in the normal state, the step It transfers to S9150. If the probability variation flag is set, that is, if it is a probability variation state, the value of the probability variation number counter is decremented by 1 (step S9142), and it is determined whether the value of the probability variation number counter becomes 0 (step S9143) . If not 0, the process moves to step S9150. If it becomes 0, the probability change flag is reset (step S9144), and the process shifts to step S9150. As a result, transition from the positive change state to the normal state is performed when the change is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times). In step S9150, CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S9150).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S9160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S9164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S9161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S9162). Here, if it is a 15R certainty variation big hit, the big hit end 1 specified command is transmitted, and if it is a 4R certain variation big hit, the big hit end 2 specified command is sent. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S9163), and the process is ended.

  In step S9164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S9165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S9165), the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts the gaming state to the probability change state (step S9167). Then, “50” is set in the probability variation counter (step S9168), and the process proceeds to step S9171.

  Then, in step S9171, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S9171).

  FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S9036) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the special symbol variation processing is being executed) (step S3201A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S9022) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203A ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, display control processing (see step S9022) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data in the display control processing of step S9022 Based on, the latest stop symbol will continue to be displayed stopped until the next variable display is started. Also, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201A (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation processing), for special symbol variation display The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a gap between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, the display result designation command transmission process also varies. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by one.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S9036), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the setting of the start flag, and based on the end flag being set. The special symbol display control data may be set to stop and display the stop symbol.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control (step S 701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the effect control command received, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step) S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 9.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the processing corresponding to the current control state (the fourth symbol process flag) is selected and in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 Execute the display control of the fourth symbol.

  After step S706, random number update processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 48 and 49) the rendering control command stored in the buffer area is. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process which is executed every 4 ms.

  62 and 63 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 specification command to display result 10 specification command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618A).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designating command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received normally.

  If the received effect control command is the jackpot start 1 designation command or the jackpot start 2 designation command (step S621A), the CPU 101 for production control sets the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or the jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S622A). In this embodiment, the big hit start 1 designated command reception flag and the big hit start 2 designated command reception flag set in step S622A are also referred to as fanfare flags.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S 679), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to be a background screen according to the normal state (for example, blue display color) It changes to background screen) (step S680).

  If the received effect control command is a definite variation state background designation command (step S 682), the effect control CPU 101 displays a background screen (for example, a red display) according to the certain variation state for the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 It changes to the background screen of a color (step S683).

  If the received effect control command is a wait for customer demonstration specification command (step S685), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a wait for customer demonstration screen on the effect display device 30 after 30 seconds (step S687). . Specifically, a timer for measuring 30 seconds is set, and when the timer times out, a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device 9. When a fluctuation pattern command or the like is received during measurement, the timer is reset and measurement is ended. After step S687, the number of pending storages stored in each pending storage number saving area is cleared (step S688).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S691). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs a first operation receiving process on a first operation effect (step S800A), and performs a second operation receiving process on a second operation effect (step S800B).

  The first operation effect is an effect performed immediately before the end of fluctuation in Super Reach A, and the first specification when the predetermined condition (detecting the operation to the push button 120 ten times) is satisfied during the first effective period. It is an effect that can be performed. Note that the first specific effect is an effect that can be executed only in a big hit variation, and is an effect that informs the player that it will be a big hit. That is, the first specific effect is not performed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the outlier fluctuation. Specifically, the first specific effect is a cut-in effect for displaying the character A. In the first operation effect, a first valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the first valid period, a first number gauge based on the number of times the operation on the push button 120 is detected in the first valid period, and the push button 120 The first operation promotion image for prompting the user to perform an operation on is displayed on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 76).

  The first valid period gauge indicates that the remaining time of the first valid period has not decreased (the start of the first valid period) from the start aspect (the state of being filled with white) to the remaining time of the first valid period. Gradually changes according to the remaining time of the first validity period (the white-painted area is changed to the end mode (black filled state) indicating that “0” is the end of the first validity period. Decreasing from the right).

  The first number gauge is divided into a plurality of areas, and each time an operation on the push button 120 is detected, it is increased (stored) stepwise by one area. Specifically, the first number gauge is a first area stored when the first operation is detected during the first effective period, and is stored when the second operation is detected during the first effective period. Second region: divided into a tenth region that can be stored when the tenth operation is detected during the first effective period. However, when the first specific effect is not performed, the tenth region is not stored. That is, when the first number gauge is stored up to the tenth area, the first specific effect is executed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made.

  As a display mode of the first operation promotion image, a first display mode in which the display range is small and a second display mode in which the display range is larger than the first display mode are provided. Specifically, the possible range of the filled area of the first effective period gauge is divided into two equal parts, and when the first effective period gauge points within a first range close to the start aspect in the first display aspect The operation promotion image is displayed, and the operation promotion image is displayed in the second display mode when the first effective period gauge points in the second range close to the end mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern of the first operation effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first operation effect pattern"), patterns A1 and A3 in which the change of the first effective period gauge is scheduled to stop once, and patterns not to stop A2 and A4 are provided. The first effective period in the patterns A1 and A3 is 5 seconds, and the first effective period in the patterns A2 and A4 is 3 seconds (see FIG. 72A). However, in the patterns A1 and A3, if the operation on the push button 120 is not detected by 2 seconds after the start of the first effective period, the first effective period is changed to 3 seconds. It is a thing.

  The second operation effect is an effect performed immediately before the end of the change in the super reach B, and the second specification when the predetermined condition (detecting the operation to the push button 120 ten times) is satisfied during the second effective period. It is an effect that can be performed. Note that the second specific effect is an effect that can be executed only in a big hit variation, and is an effect that informs the player that a big hit will be made. That is, the second specific effect is not performed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the outlier fluctuation. Specifically, the second specific effect is a cut-in effect for displaying the character B. In the second operation effect, a second valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the second valid period, a second number gauge based on the number of times the operation on the push button 120 is detected in the second valid period, and the push button 120 A second operation prompting image for prompting the user to perform an operation is displayed on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 77).

  The second valid period gauge indicates that the remaining time of the second valid period has not decreased (the start of the second valid period) from the start aspect (the state of being painted white), the remaining time of the second valid period. Is “0” (the end of the second effective period) (including the first end aspect (filled in red) and the second end aspect (filled in black)) Then, it gradually changes (the white-filled area or the red-filled area decreases from the right) according to the remaining time of the second effective period.

  The second number gauge is divided into a plurality of areas, and each time an operation on the push button 120 is detected, it is increased (stored) stepwise by one area. Specifically, the second number gauge is a first area stored when the first operation is detected during the second effective period, and is stored when the second operation is detected during the second effective period. Second region: divided into a tenth region that can be stored when the tenth operation is detected during the second effective period. However, when the second specific effect is not performed, the tenth region is not stored. That is, when the second number gauge is stored up to the tenth area, the second specific effect is executed, and it is notified that a big hit will be made.

  Although a single display mode is provided as a display mode of the second operation promotion image, a plurality of display modes having different display ranges are provided similarly to the first operation promotion image. It is also good. In addition, based on the range indicated by the second effective period gauge, the second operation promotion image may be displayed in any of the plurality of display modes.

  In addition, as an effect pattern of the second operation effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “second operation effect pattern”), the second effective period gauge changes from the start mode to the first end mode. End of the second operation effect by changing to the second end mode after passing through patterns B2 and B4 to notify the end and a common mode (state painted red) common to the start mode and the first end mode Informing patterns B1 and B3 (that is, a second operation effect pattern that appears as if the second effective period has been extended by changing again after displaying the common aspect common to the first end aspect) It is provided. The second effective period in the patterns B1 and B3 is 5 seconds, and the second effective period in the patterns B2 and B4 is 3 seconds (see FIG. 72 (B)). When changing from the start aspect to the first end aspect or the common aspect, the white fill area decreases from the right side and the red fill area is exposed, and the common aspect to the second end aspect When it changes, the red fill area decreases from the right side, and the black fill area is exposed.

Hereinafter, the first operation effect and the second operation effect may be collectively referred to as "operation effect".
After step S800B, one of the processes of steps S800 to S807 is performed according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control concerning variable display of effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process. In addition, even if it is configured to execute the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the second special symbol by another effect control process process. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which of the special symbols is displayed depending on which of the effect control process processing is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop processing (step S803): The change of the effect pattern is stopped and control is performed to derive and display the display result (stop pattern). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to either the big hit display process (step S804) or the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): If it is a big hit, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit on the effect display device 9 after the fluctuation time ends. For example, when a fanfare designation command specifying start of a big hit is received, fanfare production is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is being opened is received, display control or the like of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. For example, upon receiving a display command after the opening of the special winning opening indicating that the special winning opening is opened (closed), interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. For example, when an ending specification command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  65 and 66 are flowcharts showing the first operation reception process. In the first operation reception process, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether the first valid period flag indicating that the first valid period is in progress is set (step S2601), and if not set, The first operation reception process is ended as it is. If it is set, that is, if it is in the first validity period, the value of the first validity period timer is decremented by 1 (step S2602).

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the planned stop flag indicating that the change of the first effective period gauge is to be stopped is set (step S2603), and if not set, It transfers to step S2610. If it is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the in-stop flag indicating that the change of the first effective period gauge is stopped is set or not (step S2604), and is not set In step S2605, it is determined whether the first validity period timer has a value corresponding to 3 seconds (that is, whether the remaining time of the first validity period is 3 seconds) (step S2605). If it is not the corresponding value, the process proceeds to step S2610.

  In step S2605, when the first effective period timer has a value corresponding to 3 seconds, that is, when the remaining time of the first effective period is 3 seconds, the effect control CPU 101 performs the push button 120 in the first operation effect. It is determined whether or not the number P of times of detecting the operation to is is "1" or more (that is, whether or not the operation to the push button 120 has been performed one or more times during the first valid period) (step S2606) . If the number of times P is “1” or more, that is, if the operation to the push button 120 is performed once or more during the first effective period, the effect control CPU 101 sets the in-stop flag (step S2607). And a stop notification display for notifying that the change of the first effective period gauge is stopped (step S2608), and the process proceeds to step S2611.

  In step S2606, when the number of times P is not “1” or more, that is, when the operation to the push button 120 is not performed at least during the first valid period, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first valid period timer. A value corresponding to one second is set (step S2609A), the planned stop flag is reset (step S2609B), and the process proceeds to step S2610.

  In step S2610, the effect control CPU 101 decreases (displays) (changes) the filled area of the first effective period gauge (step S2610), and displays the first operation promotion image according to the display mode of the first effective period gauge. (Step S2611). Specifically, in step S2611, when the first effective period gauge points within the first range, the operation prompting image is displayed in the first display mode, and the first effective period gauge displays the second range. When pointing is indicated, the operation prompting image is displayed in the second display mode.

  In step S2604, when the in-stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the first valid period timer has a value corresponding to one second (step S2612), and the second period is set to one second. If it is not the corresponding value, the process proceeds to step S2611. If the value corresponds to one second, the in-stop flag and the in-stop flag are reset (steps S2613 and S2614), the stop notification display is ended (step S2615), and the process proceeds to step S2610.

  As described above, although the first effective period gauge is changed by performing step S2610, in the pattern in which the change is temporarily stopped, when the remaining time of the first effective period is 3 seconds, When one or more operations are detected, the change of the first effective period gauge is not performed by not executing step S2610 (see Y to S2608 in step S2606). In that case, by performing steps S2612 to S2615, when the remaining time of the first effective period becomes 1 second, the change of the first effective period gauge is resumed.

  Further, even if the first operation effect pattern is the patterns A1 and A3, if the push button 120 has not been operated even once until the remaining time of the first effective period becomes 3 seconds (N in step S2606) In step S2609A and step S2609B (by reducing the remaining time of the first effective period from 3 seconds to 1 second and resetting the scheduled stop flag), the change of the first effective period gauge is not stopped. , And the same behavior as in the case of the patterns A2 and A4.

  After step S2611, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the value of the first effective period timer is "0", that is, whether the first effective period has ended (step S2616), If the first validity period has ended, the process proceeds to step S2623. If the value of the first effective period timer is not “0”, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the operation to the push button 120 has been detected (step S2617), and if not detected, the first one remains unchanged. End the operation reception process.

  When the operation to the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 adds “1” to the number P (step S2618), and displays the first number gauge according to the number P (step S2619). Specifically, the first number gauge is stored and displayed up to a region corresponding to the number P of times. At this time, when the number of times P is “10”, the first number gauge is stored and displayed up to the maximum water level (the tenth region) if the pattern A1 or A2 is any, while any of the patterns A3 and A4 In this case, the first number gauge is not displayed (ie, not changed from the ninth area) up to the maximum water level (the tenth area).

  In this embodiment, when the first manipulation effect pattern is the patterns A3 and A4, the first number gauge can be stored up to the ninth area immediately before the maximum water level (the tenth area). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the water level (for example, any of the first area to the ninth area) at a stage where the first number gauge can be stored may be determined by lottery.

  Further, in this embodiment, the display of the first number gauge always changes when an operation on the push button 120 is detected, except in the case where the number of times P is “10”, which is either pattern A3 or A4. (Reserved), but it is not limited to this. For example, every time the operation to the push button 120 is detected, it is determined whether or not the display of the first number gauge changes by lottery, and the display of the first number gauge can be changed based on the lottery result. Good.

  Then, if the number of times P is "10" (Y in step S2620), it is determined whether or not the effect pattern in the first operation effect being executed is either pattern A1 or A2 (step S2621) . If the effect pattern in the first operation effect being executed is not one of the patterns A1 and A2, the process moves to step S2623.

  In step S2621, when the effect pattern in the first operation effect being executed is any of the patterns A1 and A2, the effect control CPU 101 executes the first specific effect (step S2622). As described above, in this embodiment, the first specific effect can be executed when the operation to the push button 120 is detected ten times during the first effective period.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first effective period flag (step S2623), ends the first operation effect display (step S2624), and resets a predetermined flag (step S2625). Specifically, the scheduled stop flag and the in-stop flag, which are flags related to the first operation effect, are reset. The case where the planned stop flag is set in step S2625 is the case where the predetermined condition (the push button 120 is operated ten times) is satisfied before the stop of the change of the first effective period gauge is ended. . When the stop flag is set in step S2625, the predetermined condition (the push button 120 is operated 10 times) before the start of the stop of the change of the first effective period gauge is ended. Is established.

  As described above, when the first valid period ends or the operation on the push button 120 is detected ten times, the first operation effect is ended.

  67 and 68 are flowcharts showing the second operation reception process. In the second operation reception process, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether the second effective period flag indicating that the second effective period is in progress is set (step S2801), and if it is not set, The second operation acceptance process is ended as it is. If it is set, that is, if it is in the second validity period, the value of the second validity period timer is decremented by 1 (step S2802).

  After that, the CPU for effect control 101 intends to change the second effective period gauge to the second end mode, and has already displayed the common mode (that is, after the second effective period has been displayed as if it were extended). (Step S2803), and if not set, the effect control CPU 101 decreases and displays the white fill area of the second effective period gauge (Step S2804). Then, the effect control CPU 101 plans to change the second effective period gauge to the second end mode, and has not yet displayed the common mode (that is, before the second effective period is shown as if it were extended). It is determined whether or not an extension scheduled flag indicating that there is a flag is set (step S2805), and if the extension scheduled flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2809. If the extension scheduled flag is set, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether the second effective period timer has a value corresponding to 3 seconds (step S2806), and if the value does not correspond to 3 seconds. The process moves to step S2809. If the value corresponds to 3 seconds, the extension completion flag is reset (step S2807), and the process proceeds to step S2809.

  If the extended flag is set in step S2803, the effect control CPU 101 decreases the red fill area of the second effective period gauge (step S2808), and proceeds to step S2809.

  Thus, by performing steps S2805 to S2808, if the extension scheduled flag is set, the white fill area in the second effective period gauge is used until the remaining time of the second effective period reaches 3 seconds. In addition to the reduction display, when the remaining time of the second validity period is 3 seconds, the red fill area in the second validity period gauge is decreased and displayed.

  In step S2809, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the value of the second valid period timer is “0”, that is, whether the second valid period has ended (step S2809), “0”. If the second validity period has ended, the process proceeds to step S2816. If the value of the second effective period timer is not “0”, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the operation to the push button 120 has been detected (step S 2810), and if not detected, the second as it is End the operation reception process.

  When the operation on the push button 120 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 adds “1” to the number Q (step S2811), and displays a second number gauge according to the number Q (step S2812). Specifically, the second number gauge is stored and displayed up to a region corresponding to the number Q of times. At this time, if the number of times Q is "10", while the second number gauge is stored and displayed up to the maximum water level (the tenth region) if any of the patterns B1 and B2, either of the patterns B3 and B4 If it is, the second number gauge is not displayed (ie, not changed from the ninth area) up to the maximum water level (the tenth area).

  In this embodiment, when the second operation effect pattern is the patterns B3 and B4, the second number gauge can be stored up to the ninth area immediately before the maximum water level (the tenth area). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the water level (for example, any of the first area to the ninth area) at a stage where the second number gauge can be stored may be determined by lottery.

  Further, in this embodiment, the display of the second number gauge changes whenever the operation on the push button 120 is detected except in the case where the number Q is “10”, which is either of the patterns B3 and B4. (Reserved), but it is not limited to this. For example, every time the operation on the push button 120 is detected, it is determined whether or not the display of the second gauge changes by a lottery, and the display of the second gauge can be changed based on the lottery result. Good.

  Then, if the number of times Q is “10” (Y in step S2813), it is determined whether or not the effect pattern in the second operation effect being executed is either pattern B1 or B2 (step S2814) . If the effect pattern in the second operation effect being executed is not one of the patterns B1 and B2, the process moves to step S2816.

  In step S2814, when the effect pattern in the second operation effect being executed is any of the patterns B1 and B2, the effect control CPU 101 executes the second specific effect (step S2815). As described above, in this embodiment, the second specific effect can be executed when the operation to the push button 120 is detected ten times during the second effective period.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 resets the second effective period flag (step S2816), ends the second operation effect display (step S2817), and resets a predetermined flag (step S2818). Specifically, the extension scheduled flag and the extension completed flag, which are flags related to the second operation effect, are reset. The case where the extension scheduled flag is set in step S2818 is the case where the second operation effect is executed in any of the effect patterns of patterns B1 and B3. Further, the case where the extended flag is set in step S2818 is the case where the second operation effect is executed in one of the effect patterns of patterns B1 and B3 and the common mode is already displayed.

  Thus, when the second valid period ends or when the operation on the push button 120 is detected ten times, the second operation effect is ended.

  FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect pattern (stopped) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8002). That is, the processing of step S8002 is executed by the effect control CPU 101, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect pattern according to the variable display pattern (the change pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. In addition, when using the fluctuation pattern which designates the pseudo run, when the pseudo run is specified with the fluctuation pattern command, CPU101 for production control CPU, in step S8002, as the temporary stop design of the pseudo run the chance eye design ( For example, a combination of a jackpot symbol and a symbol whose one symbol deviates, such as "223" or "445", which is not a reach, is also determined. Note that the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the CPU for effect control 101 may determine whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the production symbol based only on the fluctuation pattern command. .

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 71, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 is As the stop design 3 combinations of the production design which is the same odd design with the same design is decided. Moreover, when the received display result designation command indicates "4R probability variation big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. Determines the combination of the rendering symbols that are aligned with the same even symbols.

  Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data representing a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about a production pattern, it is called a big hit design the stop pattern (combination of the symbols in which the left middle and the right are all aligned with the same design) that evokes a big hit. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 executes an advance notice effect setting process for setting an advance notice effect (step S8003). Here, for example, whether or not the variation to be started is a big hit or not, if it is a big hit, which big hit type, or based on the read variation pattern etc., a predetermined advance notice effect (for example, the reliability for the big hit) The presence or absence of the execution of the step-up notice that develops up to the stage corresponding to the button effect, etc. when the effect screen is switched by accepting the operation on the operation member from the player is determined.

  Then, if the variation control pattern for executing super reach A (Y in step S3910), the effect control CPU 101 executes the first operation effect pattern lottery process for determining the first operation effect pattern (step S3910). S3911) The lottery result is stored (step S3912). In step S3911, specifically, the first operation effect pattern lottery process is executed using the first operation effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (A).

  FIG. 72 (A) is an explanatory view showing a first operation effect pattern lottery table. In the first operation effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (A), a determination value for each variable display result (big hit, out) is assigned to the first operation effect pattern, but FIG. 72 (A) In the example shown in FIG. 5, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown in order to simplify the explanation. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for the first operation effect pattern lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  The pattern A1 is a first operation effect pattern that executes a first specific effect when a predetermined condition (detection of ten operations on the push button 120) is satisfied during a first effective period of five seconds. The pattern A2 is a first operation effect pattern that executes a first specific effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a first effective period of 3 seconds. The pattern A3 is a first operation effect pattern which does not execute the first specific effect even when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the first effective period of 5 seconds. The pattern A4 is a first operation effect pattern which does not execute the first specific effect even when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the first effective period of 3 seconds. As described above, the patterns A1 and A3 are the first operation effect patterns in which the change of the first effective period gauge is scheduled to stop temporarily, and the patterns A2 and A4 are the first change of the first effective period gauge not stopped. It is an operation effect pattern.

  For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, pattern A1 at 40%, pattern A2 at 30%, pattern A3 at 20%, pattern A4 at 10%, 1 is selected as an operation effect pattern.

  In addition, for example, when the variable display result is a release, the pattern A3 is selected at a rate of 30%, and the pattern A4 is selected as a first operation effect pattern at a rate of 70%.

  As described above, since the patterns A1 and A2 capable of executing the first specific effect can be selected only in the case of a big hit, the first specific effect can be executed only in the case of a big hit. It has become. Further, the patterns A1 and A3 having the first effective period of 5 seconds are configured to be more easily selected in the case of a big hit than the patterns A2 and A4 having the first effective period of 3 seconds. The patterns A1 and A3 in which the first effective period is 5 seconds have higher reliability against the big hit than the patterns A2 and A4 in which the first effective period is 3 seconds. As described above, the patterns A1 and A3 are effect patterns that are scheduled to temporarily stop the change of the first effective period gauge. Therefore, when the change of the first validity period gauge is temporarily stopped, the reliability against the big hit is higher than when the change of the first validity period gauge is not stopped.

  After step S3912 or when N in step S3910, the effect control CPU 101 determines the second operation effect pattern if it is a fluctuation pattern for executing super reach B (Y in step S3913). The second operation effect pattern lottery process is executed (step S3914), and the lottery result is stored (step S3915). In step S3914, specifically, the second operation effect pattern lottery process is executed using the second operation effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (B).

  FIG. 72 (B) is an explanatory view showing a second operation effect pattern lottery table. In the second operation effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (B), a determination value for each variable display result (big hit, out) is assigned to the second operation effect pattern, but FIG. 72 (B) In the example shown in FIG. 5, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown in order to simplify the explanation. For example, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for the second operation effect pattern lottery, and determines it as a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  The pattern B1 is a second operation effect pattern that executes a second specific effect when a predetermined condition (detection of ten operations on the push button 120) is satisfied during a second effective period of six seconds. The pattern B2 is a second operation effect pattern that executes a second specific effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a second effective period of 3 seconds. The pattern B3 is a second operation effect pattern which does not execute the second specific effect even when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the second effective period of 6 seconds. The pattern B4 is a second operation effect pattern which does not execute the second specific effect even when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the second effective period of 3 seconds. As described above, the patterns B1 and B3 are the second operation effect patterns in which the second valid period gauge changes from the start mode to the second end mode after passing through the common mode common to the first end mode. B2 and B4 are a second operation effect pattern in which the second effective period gauge changes from the start mode to the first end mode.

  For example, if the variable display result is a big hit, pattern B1 at 70%, pattern B2 at 15%, pattern B3 at 10%, pattern B4 at 5%, [2] It is selected as an operation effect pattern.

  In addition, for example, when the variable display result is a release, the pattern B3 is selected at a rate of 30% and the pattern B4 is selected as a second operation effect pattern at a rate of 70%.

  As described above, since the patterns B1 and B2 capable of executing the second specific effect can be selected only in the case of a big hit, the second specific effect can be executed only in the case of a big hit. It has become. In addition, since patterns B1 and B3 having the second effective period of 6 seconds are configured to be more easily selected in the case of a big hit than patterns B2 and B4 having the second effective period of 3 seconds. The patterns B1 and B3 having the second effective period of 6 seconds have higher reliability against the big hit than the patterns B2 and B4 having the second effective period of 3 seconds. As described above, the patterns B1 and B3 are effect patterns scheduled to change to the second end mode after the second effective period gauge is changed to the common mode. Therefore, when the second validity period gauge changes even after being changed to the common mode common to the first end mode, it is changed to the first end mode and the second validity period ends, It has a high reliability for the big hit.

  In addition, by executing the second operation effect pattern lottery process using the second operation effect pattern lottery table, the second operation effect pattern having a second effective period of 6 seconds is selected if the second operation effect pattern is selected. The rate at which the specific effect is performed is higher than when the second operation effect pattern having an effective period of 3 seconds is selected. Therefore, when the second validity period gauge changes even after being changed to the common mode common to the first end mode, it is changed to the first end mode and the second validity period ends, It has a high degree of reliability to execute the specific effect.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 selects the process table corresponding to the notice effect when the fluctuation pattern and the notice effect are to be executed (step S8008A). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8009A).

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory view of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. showing the mode of each fluctuation constituting the fluctuation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the production symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the production symbol It includes the effect mode other than the effect pattern on the screen. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the rendering time in the rendering mode is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and displays the effect pattern in the mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer setting value and the character image or background displayed on the display screen Control to display. In addition, it controls the blinking of the light emitter in the mode set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and controls the sound output from the speaker 27.

  The process table shown in FIG. 73 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to the contents of each variation pattern and the notice effect. In the case where it is determined in the process of step S8008A or the like that execution of the notice effect is to be performed, data corresponding to the notice effect is set, a process table is selected, and it is not determined to execute the notice effect. , Select a process table for which no data corresponding to the notice effect has been set.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  After step S8009A, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, LED and character) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (step S8010A).

  After step S8010A, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8011A). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802) (step S8012A).

  FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing a process during production design fluctuation (step S802) in the production control process processing. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the first operation effect execution timing to start the execution of the first operation effect (step S3301), and it is not the first operation effect execution timing. The process proceeds to step S3308. In step S3301, specifically, in the case of the fluctuation pattern for executing the super reach A, it is determined whether or not it is the first operation effect execution timing predetermined for each fluctuation pattern. If it is the first operation effect execution timing, the first effective period flag is set (step S3302), the number P is set to "0" (step S3303), and the first operation effect pattern stored in step S3912 is executed. The first effective period timer is set to the first value (a value corresponding to 5 seconds for patterns A1 and A3, a value corresponding to 3 seconds for patterns A2 and A4) (step S3304).

  Then, if the first operation effect pattern stored in step S3912 is one of the patterns A1 and A3, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop schedule flag (Y in step S3305, S3306), and displays the first operation effect display. Is started (step S3307). Specifically, the first operation effect display is to display a first effective period gauge, a first number gauge, and a first operation promotion image.

  Thereafter, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether or not it is the second operation effect execution timing (step S3308), and if it is not the second operation effect execution timing, the process proceeds to step S8101. In step S3308, specifically, in the case of the fluctuation pattern for executing the super reach B, it is determined whether or not it is the second operation effect execution timing predetermined for each fluctuation pattern. If it is the second operation effect execution timing, the second effective period flag is set (step S3309), the number Q is set to "0" (step S3310), and the second operation effect pattern stored in step S3915 is executed. The second effective period timer is set to the second value (a value corresponding to 6 seconds for patterns B1 and B3 and a value corresponding to 3 seconds for patterns B2 and B4) (step S3311).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an extension scheduled flag if the second operation effect pattern stored in step S3915 is any of the patterns B1 and B3 (Y in step S3312, S3313), and the second operation effect display Is started (step S3314). Specifically, the second operation effect display is to display a second effective period gauge, a second number gauge, and a second operation promotion image.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts one from the value of the fluctuation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S8105).

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8176A), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8177A).

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S861). Then, if the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S867. In this embodiment, as described later, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S866. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S868. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set at step S861 is a step at which the big hit symbol has been displayed but the fanfare effect has not been executed yet, so the processing to display the stop symbol of the effect symbol at step S862 The processing moves to step S867 without repeatedly executing.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (disappeared symbol or big hit symbol) (step S862). The effect control CPU 101 may perform control to stop and display the effect pattern in response to the reception of the symbol determination designation command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In this embodiment, the effect pattern to be stopped and displayed is displayed peristaltically in the period immediately before step S 862 is executed.

  When a big hit symbol is displayed in step S 862 (Y in step S 863), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S 866), and the fanfare flag (big hit start 1 designated command reception flag or big hit start 2 It is confirmed whether or not the designated command reception flag is set (step S867). When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S867), the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S868), and selects process data according to the fanfare effect (step S869). Then, the process timer is started (step S870).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S871).

  Further, when the big hit symbol is not displayed in step S863 (ie, when disclosing symbol is displayed: N in step S863), the CPU 101 for effect control resets a predetermined flag (step S864). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets a command reception flag. Note that the effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process processing or the fourth symbol process processing (for example, when the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is confirmed, the fluctuation pattern command is immediately performed) The reception flag may be reset).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S865).

  Next, a display example in the operation effect of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is an explanatory view showing a display example in the first operation effect. FIG. 76 shows a display example of the effect display device 9 for each timing in each first operation effect pattern. The display example shown in FIG. 76 shows the case where the number of times the operation on the push button 120 has been detected during the first effective period is less than ten times. For example, when the first manipulation effect pattern is the patterns A1 and A3, when the first valid period starts, the first number gauge 371, the first valid period gauge 372, and the operation prompting image 373 are displayed. At this time, since the range indicated by the first effective period gauge 371 is the first range, the operation prompting image 373 is displayed in the first display mode.

  Next, the filled area of the first effective period gauge 372 is reduced and displayed with the passage of time, and the operation promoting image 373 is displayed in a display mode based on the range indicated by the first effective period gauge 372. Specifically, the operation prompting image 373 is displayed in the first display mode if the first effective period gauge 372 points in the first range, and in the second display mode if the first valid period gauge 372 indicates the second range. (The display mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode when 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first valid period). Further, each time the operation on the push button 120 is detected, the first number gauge 371 changes to a display according to the number P.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the operation promotion image 373 is changed to the first display mode or the second display mode, it is changed according to the range indicated by the first effective period gauge 371, but detection of the operation on the push button 120 The display mode of the operation promotion image 373 may be changed according to the number of times and the detection time. For example, while changing the operation promotion image 373 under the condition that the number of times pressed on the push button 120 and the pressed time have reached a specific number or time (for example, 10 times or 5 seconds), When the player's operation is being performed continuously, such as controlling to change to medium size, large size for 20 times, and extra large size for 30 times, etc. Accordingly, the display mode of the operation promotion image 373 may be changed.

  As described above, by changing the display mode of the operation promotion image 373 to the display mode according to the detected period of the operation, the display of the operation promotion image that is not monotonous can be performed, so that the interest can be improved.

  Further, in this case, the ratio of a big hit may differ depending on the changed display mode of the operation promoting image 373, or effects to be performed after the display mode changes may be selected and executed at different rates.

  Then, when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first valid period (when the remaining time of the first valid period is 3 seconds (Y in step S2605)), the operation on the push button 120 is received. (Y in step S2606), a period in which the change of the first effective period gauge is stopped (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "first effective period gauge change stop period"). The first valid period gauge change stop period is started two seconds after the start of the first valid period, and ends four seconds after the first valid period is started. When the operation to the push button 120 is detected during the first effective period gauge change stop period, the first number gauge 371 changes to a display according to the operation number (number P) as in the other periods. Do. Also, during the first effective period gauge change stop period, a stop notification display 374 such as “Continuous shot plus!” Is performed.

  Then, after the end of the first effective period gauge change stop period, the filled area of the first effective period gauge 372 is displayed to decrease as time passes until the first effective period ends. Further, each time the operation on the push button 120 is detected, the first number gauge 371 changes to a display according to the number P.

  Further, for example, when the first operation effect pattern is the patterns A2 and A4, it is the same as the case where the first operation effect pattern is the patterns A1 and A3 until 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first effective period. Show the behavior. Then, even after 2 seconds have passed since the start of the first valid period, the filled area of the first valid period gauge 372 is displayed to decrease with the lapse of time until the first valid period ends. Further, each time the operation on the push button 120 is detected, the first number gauge 371 changes to a display according to the number P.

  As described above, when the first operation effect of the patterns A1 and A3 is performed, the change of the first effective period gauge 372 stops two seconds after the first effective period is started. As a result, it can appear as if the first validity period has been extended, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, when the change of the first effective period gauge 372 is stopped, the stop notification display 374 is performed, and the player is notified that the stop of the change of the first effective period gauge 372 is due to the occurrence of a defect. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding.

  When the first operation effect of the patterns A1 and A3 is performed, the change of the first effective period gauge 372 is stopped 2 seconds after the start of the first effective period, while the first of the patterns A2 and A4 is performed. When the operation effect is performed, the change of the first effective period gauge 372 does not stop. As a result, even when the first operation effect of the patterns A2 and A4 is performed, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the change of the first effective period gauge 372 to stop, thereby improving the interest be able to.

  In addition, by changing the display mode of the operation promotion image 373 based on the display of the first effective period gauge 372, the interest can be improved.

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory view showing a display example in the second operation effect. FIG. 77 shows a display example of the effect display device 9 when executing the second operation effect. Note that the display example shown in FIG. 77 shows the case where the number of times the operation on the push button 120 has been detected during the second valid period is less than 10 times. For example, when the second valid period starts, regardless of the second operation effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the second number gauge 381, the second valid period gauge 382, and An operation promotion image 383 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), regardless of which pattern the second operation effect pattern is, the white fill area in the second effective period gauge 382 is reduced as time passes, and the red fill is displayed. The area is exposed. Further, every time the operation on the push button 120 is detected, the second number gauge 381 changes to a display according to the number Q.

  Then, if the second operation effect pattern is any one of the patterns B2 and B4, as shown in FIG. 77C, when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the second effective period, the second effective period The gauge 382 is in the first end mode, and the second valid period ends.

  In addition, if the second operation effect pattern is any of the patterns B1 and B3, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), as shown in FIG. 77 (D), 3 seconds have passed since the start of the second effective period. At this point, the second validity period gauge 382 becomes a common aspect common to the first end aspect. As time passes further, as shown in FIG. 77 (E), the red fill area in the second effective period gauge 382 is displayed to be reduced to expose the black fill area. Then, six seconds after the start of the second valid period, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the second valid period gauge 382 becomes the second end mode, and the second valid period ends.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 (E) and 77 (F), after the entire range of the second effective period gauge 382 becomes a red fill area, it further changes to a black fill area. Although the case where it advances is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, a plurality of types of change modes (for example, different fill colors and patterns) are provided after the entire range of the second effective period gauge 382 becomes a red fill area, and red fill is performed according to any change mode. The degree of expectation (big hit expectation, reach expectation, probability change expectation) may be configured to be different depending on whether the area is further changed.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the entire range of the second effective period gauge 382 becomes a red filled region, the second effective period gauge 382 changes once (in this example, a black filled region). Although the case of changing is shown, the second validity period gauge 382 may change a plurality of times without being limited to such a mode. For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), even if the second effective period gauge 382 changes to a black fill area and then the second effective period gauge 382 changes to another color fill area. Good.

  Thus, as the second operation effect pattern, the patterns B2 and B4 in which the second valid period gauge 382 is changed from the start mode to the first end mode and the second valid period ends, and the second valid period gauge 382 starts It is assumed that patterns B1 and B3 are provided that are changed from the mode to the second end mode after passing through the common mode and the second valid period ends. Thereby, the player's expectation can be sustained.

  In addition, by detecting the operation on the push button 120 and changing the display mode of the second number gauge 381, the interest can be improved.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, it is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (in this example, the pressing operation on the push button 120) Sensor capable of detecting an operation on another operation member (in this example, a trigger sensor 125 capable of detecting a pressing operation on a trigger button 121, a tilting operation on a stick controller 122) Tilt direction sensor unit 123), or may be a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or a motion sensor), and the effective period of operation (in this example, the first effective period). (In this example, indication of the first effective period gauge) is performed, and the display mode of the indication is changed to a predetermined mode (in the present example, the end mode) Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S2610 and S3307), and before the display mode of the suggestion display changes to the predetermined mode, the predetermined condition based on the detection of the operation (in this example, 10 for the push button 120). If the state changes based on the movement detection, the meter, the numerical value, the display effect (effect to defeat the enemy character), and the lighting of the lamp will be in a predetermined state. It is also possible to execute a specific effect (in the present example, a first specific effect) when the) is established (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes step S2622). Moreover, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is possible to stop the change of the display mode of the suggestion display before the display mode of the suggestion display changes to the predetermined mode (in this example, the microcomputer for effect control) By performing Y to S2608 of step S2606 or steps S2612 to S2615, the execution of step S2610 can be avoided and the change of the first effective period gauge can be stopped. As a result, the change of the indication of the indication may be stopped, so that the actual effective period may be longer than the appearance of the indication of the indication, and it may appear as if the effective period is extended, thereby improving the interest. it can.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the operation is continuously detected by the detection means (in this example, 10 operations (continuous hitting) on the push button 120 are detected. Operation continued for a predetermined time or more (so-called operation) And a long press) may be detected as the predetermined condition, and the specific effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the number of times P in step S2620). Step S2622 can be executed only in the case of "10". This makes it possible to make it appear that the effective period of the continuous operation is extended, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect display (in this example, the display of the first number gauge) is performed, and the display mode of the effect display is gradually changed based on the detection of the operation by the detection means ( In this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes step S2619), and the display mode of the effect display detects a first operation on the push button 120 during the first effective period (in this example, the first effective period). In the case where it has been changed to the first area stored if it has been stored up to the first area, and may be stored to a predetermined area after the second area), the change of the display mode of the suggestion display is stopped (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 can avoid step S2610 only when Y in step S2606). This makes it possible to properly stop the change of the indication indication. In addition, since the change of the display mode of the suggestion display is stopped when the player positively operates, the positive operation can be promoted.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a notification effect (in this example, the display of “continuous hitting plus”) for notifying that the change of the display mode of the suggestion display is stopped (in this example, for effect control) The microcomputer 100 executes step S2608). This makes it possible to prevent the stopping of the change in the indication of suggestion from being misunderstood to be a defect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first indication (the patterns A2 and A4 in this example) in which the actual effective period and the suggested effective period coincide with each other does not coincide with the actual effective period and the suggested effective period. It is possible to perform the second indication display (in the present example, patterns A1 and A3) (in the present example, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the first operation effect pattern by performing step S3911, By performing step S3304, the first effective period according to the first operation effect pattern is set. As a result, even in the first suggestion display, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the stop of the change in the display mode of the suggestion display.

  Further, in this embodiment, the promotion display for urging the player's operation is performed (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S2611 and S3307), and the player's operation is performed while the promotion display is being performed. Is continuously detected, the display mode of the prompting display (in the present example, the first display mode, the second display mode. It is possible to change to three or more display modes according to the period when the operation is continuously detected. (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the first operation promotion display according to the remaining time of the first effective period indicated by the first effective period gauge in step S2611. By changing the display mode of the first operation prompting display according to the elapsed first valid period, it is determined. Thus, by performing the rendering that is not monotonous, it is possible to prevent the rendering from being monotonous and to improve the interest.

  It should be noted that the display mode of the promotion display is the player's operation (for example, the number of times the operation to the push button 120 is detected) and the reliability (for example, the reliability for performing a specific effect or a big hit). It may be variable according to the reliability).

  Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, it is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (in this example, the push button 120 A push sensor 124 capable of detecting a pressing operation that can detect an operation on another operation member (in this example, a trigger sensor 125 capable of detecting a pressing operation on the trigger button 121 and a tilting operation on the stick controller 122 It may be a detectable tilt direction sensor unit 123) or may be a non-contact type sensor such as an infrared sensor or a motion sensor), and the effective period of operation (in this example, (2) In the present example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs step S280 to perform suggestion display (in this example, display of the second effective period gauge). , To run the S2808, S3314). In addition, the first mode (in this example, patterns B2 and B4 in this example) indicating the end of the effective period by changing the indication to a predetermined state (in this example, the first end mode), and the display common to the predetermined state A second aspect (in this example, the pattern in this example) that indicates the end of the effective period by changing to the specific state (in this example, the second end aspect) after changing to the aspect (in this example, the common aspect) It is possible to perform suggestion display in one of the modes B1 and B3) (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the second operation effect pattern in step S3914 and then performs step S2804. , S2808)). Thus, after the suggestion display is changed to the display mode common to the predetermined state, the valid period is reached until the indication state is further changed to the specific state, so that the sense of expectation can be maintained.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the effect (in the present example, the second operation effect) in which the operation is continuously detected by the detection means, the suggestion display is performed in the second mode (in the present example, the effect control micro The computer 100 can execute a second operation effect (which may be an effect for detecting a continued operation for a predetermined time or longer (so-called long press)) for detecting a continuous hit on the push button 120 with the patterns B1 and B3 Yes). This makes it possible to make it appear that the effective period of the continuous operation is extended, and the interest can be improved.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the change display in which the display mode changes in response to the detection of the operation by the detection means (in this example, the display of the second number gauge. The change of the numerical value or the predetermined display) It is decided to perform changing (for example, damage to the enemy character may be defeated) (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes step S2812). This makes it possible to improve the interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion display according to the second aspect is more reliable than the suggestion display according to the first aspect for being controlled to a state advantageous to the player (in this example, for presentation control) The microcomputer 100 selects the second operation effect pattern using the second operation effect pattern lottery table shown in FIG. 72 (B), whereby the second operation effect of the patterns B2 and B4 is executed rather than the pattern B1. , And B3 are performed with higher reliability for the big hit and higher reliability for the specific effect being performed. This can give the player a sense of expectation.

  In this embodiment, the gauges (the first effective period gauge and the second effective period gauge) are displayed as the “indication display”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, numerical indication (for example, the remaining time is displayed as "remaining 3 seconds", "remaining 1 second" or the like) or change of a predetermined image (for example, character or item) is "suggested display" It is also good.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was decided to execute the first specific effect as the "specific effect", the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect in which an ally character wins over an enemy character, an effect in which a predetermined sound is output from the speaker 27, an effect in which a predetermined light emitting member (frame LED 28 or board LED provided on the game board 6) emits light, The effect that the first number gauge performs a specific change (for example, a change in size or light emission) may be executed as a “specific effect”, or the first number gauge may reach the maximum water level. What is stored itself may be executed as a “specific effect” (ie, an effect different from the change of the first number gauge may not be performed as a specific effect).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although "specific effect" is executable only when it is a big hit, it is not limited to this, and "specific effect" can also be performed when it is out You may do it.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the predetermined condition is not established during the effective period (when 10 operations on the push button 120 are not detected during the first effective period or the second effective period), the specific effect is obtained. However, the specific effect may be executable even when the predetermined condition is not established during the effective period.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it has been described that stopping of the change of the first effective period gauge can be performed only once in the first operation effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and stopping of the change can be performed multiple times It may be

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the length of the stop period of the 1st effective period gauge in 1st operation production is uniform, it is not restricted to this. For example, a plurality of times may be provided as the length of the stop period, and any time may be selected. In that case, depending on which time is selected as the length of the stop period, the reliability (for example, the reliability for the execution of the first specific effect, the reliability for the big hit) differs. It is also good.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the patterns B1 and B3 in the second operation effect, a period until the second effective period gauge changes from the start mode to the common mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “first half period”), Although the period from the common mode to the second end mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “second half period”) is 3 seconds, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the first half period and the second half period may be different. In that case, the decrease rate of the fill area of the second effective period gauge in the first half period is different from the decrease rate of the fill area of the second effective period gauge in the second half period, and the interest can be improved.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the length of the second half period is uniform, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of times may be provided as the length of the second half period, and any time may be selected. In that case, depending on which time is selected as the length of the second half period, the reliability (for example, the reliability for the execution of the second specified effect, the reliability for the big hit) differs. It is also good.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first operation effect and the second operation effect are performed in the variation accompanied by the super reach A and the super reach B, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in any variation pattern, at least one of the first operation effect and the second operation effect may be executable.

  In addition, the degree of reliability (for example, the degree of reliability for the specific effect (the first specified effect, the second specified effect) being performed, and the degree of reliability for the big hit) differ between the first operation effect and the second operation effect. You may do it.

  Further, in this embodiment, although the first specific effect and the second specific effect are different effects, the present invention is not limited to this, and an aspect in which the first specific effect and the second specific effect are the same. Showing effects (eg, effects for performing a predetermined display, effects for operating a predetermined effect movable member (so-called character), effects for emitting a predetermined light emitting member, effects for outputting a predetermined sound) Good.

  In addition, a high-reliability effect (for example, a victory effect in which an ally character beats an enemy character) is notified that the possibility of a big hit (including the possibility of a big hit reliably) by the effect content (a first effect) When it is considered as specific effect, the second specific effect, and the operation effect is ended while the execution condition of the specific effect is not satisfied (when it is an operation effect pattern that detects 10 operations but does not execute the specific effect, or 10 times If the effective period ends without detecting the operation of (If the first effective period is a first operation effect pattern of 5 seconds, detect one operation until 2 seconds have elapsed from the start. Low reliability presentation (examples) in which it is notified that the possibility of becoming a big hit is low by the contents of a presentation different from the high-reliability presentation without including steps S2609A and S2609B). For example, in a gaming machine that executes a defeat effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character, low reliability operation is performed when a condition for executing a specific effect is not established despite execution being a big hit. Execute relief effect (for example, effect that ally character gets up and defeats enemy character) after execution of degree effect (for example, if victory effect, defeat effect, and relief effect are effects by process data, at the end of the first operation effect Alternatively, when the second operation effect is finished, it may be notified that a big hit will be made by replacing the process table performing the defeat effect and the relief effect from the process table performing the victory effect.

  In addition, in the case where a standby effect (for example, an effect of notifying a variable display result) to be executed while waiting for the first effective period to elapse is provided, the effect based on the length of the first effective period is provided. The timing at which the effect is performed will be different. For example, when the first operation effect in the patterns A1 and A3 is performed, while the first effective period ends 3 seconds after the start of the execution of the first operation effect, the first operation effect in the patterns A2 and A4 is performed. In this case, since the first effective period ends 5 seconds after the start of the execution of the first operation effect, an error of 2 seconds occurs depending on the first operation effect pattern. Therefore, when the first operation effect (first operation effect in patterns A2 and A4) in which the first effective period is 3 seconds is performed, the first operation effect (pattern A1, 5 in which the first effective period is 5 seconds) The period from the end of the standby effect to the stop display of the effect pattern (specifically, the period in which the effect pattern to be stop-displayed is displayed peristaltically) than when the first operation effect in A3 is performed The length of the fluctuation time may be adjusted by providing a long time of 2 seconds. In addition, when the length of the first effective period (whether or not to stop the change of the first effective period gauge) is associated with the fluctuation pattern, the first operation effect of which the first effective period is 3 seconds. The variation pattern for executing (the first operation effect which does not stop the change of the first effective period gauge) is the first operation effect (the first effective period gauge stops the change of which the first effective period is 5 seconds) If the fluctuation time is set to be shorter than the fluctuation pattern for performing 1 operation effect) for 2 seconds, it is not necessary to perform the adjustment described above.

  Similarly, in the second operation effect, when the second operation effect (second operation effect in the patterns B2 and B4) in which the second effective period is 3 seconds is performed, the second effective period is 6 seconds. A period from the end of the standby effect to the stop display of the effect pattern (specifically, the effect to be stop-displayed) than in the case where the two-operation effect (the second operation effect in the patterns B1 and B3) is performed The fluctuation time may be adjusted by providing a period of peristaltic display of the pattern for a long time of 3 seconds. In addition, when the length of the second effective period (whether or not the second effective period appears to be extended) is associated with the variation pattern, the second operation effect in which the second effective period is 3 seconds. The variation pattern that executes (the second operation effect that does not appear to have an extension of the second effective period) is a second operation effect (the second effective period is extended) in which the second effective period is 6 seconds. If the fluctuation time is set to be 3 seconds shorter than the fluctuation pattern for executing the second operation effect), the above-mentioned adjustment does not need to be performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, before the display mode of the suggestion display changes to the predetermined mode, the effect of stopping the change of the display mode of the suggestion display (first operation effect) and changing the suggestion display to the predetermined state Any one of the first aspect that suggests the end of the effective period by the second aspect and the second aspect that indicates the end of the effective period by changing it to the specific state after changing it to the display aspect common to the predetermined state Although the effects (second operation effects) for performing the suggestion display in the aspect are different effects from each other, they may be the same effect.

  For example, the indication indicating the effective period of the action is displayed, the indication is changed to a predetermined state or a specific state, and the predetermined condition based on the detection of the action before the indication mode of the indication changes to the predetermined aspect It is possible to execute the specific effect when the condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is possible to stop the change of the indication before the indication changes to the predetermined state or the specific state. The first mode which suggests the end of the effective period by changing the display to the predetermined state, and the change to the specific state after suggesting the end of the effective period after changing it to the display state common to the predetermined state An effect capable of performing suggestion display in any of the modes with the second mode may be performed.

  Specifically, a third valid period gauge indicating the third valid period of operation is displayed, and the third end period gauge is painted from the start state (white-painted state) to the first end mode (red color) First pattern that indicates the end of the third validity period by changing to the state of (3), and after once changing from the start state to the common mode common to the first end mode (the state painted in red) Further, a second pattern that indicates the end of the third effective period by changing to the second end state (the state of being painted black) is provided as an effect pattern, and the first pattern and the second pattern At least one of them may be capable of temporarily stopping the change of the third lifetime gauge. The timing at which the change of the third validity period gauge is temporarily stopped in the second pattern may be before changing to the common mode or after changing to the common mode, or both of them. May be

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect is performed based on the detection of the operation on the push button 120, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first promotion notification for prompting the player's first action and the second promotion notification for prompting the player's second action are performed, and before the first promotion notification and the second promotion notification, a plurality of modes of notification before promotion The game machine which performs notification before promotion of one of the above, and is capable of detecting the first operation and the second operation, is capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the detection result, Depending on the types of (1) the promotion notification and the second promotion notification, the ratio at which the effect of the content advantageous to the player is notified may be different as the predetermined effect. Specifically, this will be described using the following modification. The description of the same parts as those of the embodiment described above will be omitted.

  In this modification, it is possible to detect the pressing operation on the push button 120 and the tilting operation on the stick controller 122.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing processing for determining an operation presentation such as a button in the modification. The button etc. operation effect determination process is a process performed by the CPU for effect control 101 in the case of the fluctuation pattern indicating the super reach in the effect pattern fluctuation start process (FIG. 70). In the operation production determination process for buttons and the like shown in FIG. 78, the CPU 101 for effect control executes operation promotion display determination processing for determining the type of operation promotion display as the operation promotion notification (step S293A). In the operation promotion display determination process (step S293A), one operation promotion display is determined from among a plurality of types of operation promotion displays (for example, the operation promotion display of the push button 120 and the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122).

  In addition, the operation promotion display determined in step S293A is executed in step S8105 of the process during effect symbol variation (FIG. 74).

  Specifically, in the operation promotion display determination process (step S293A) shown in FIG. 78, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the operation promotion display determination random number SR0 (see FIG. 79), and the extracted numerical data The type of the operation promotion display is determined using the operation promotion display determination table shown in FIG. 80 (A). For example, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), in the case where the variation pattern is a super reach loss, “promotion display of push button operation” is determined with a probability of 70%, and “promotion display of stick controller operation” is 30. It is determined by the probability of%. Also, when the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot, “promotion of push button operation prompting” is determined with a probability of 40%, and “stick controller operation prompting display” is determined with a probability of 60%. It has become.

  By setting the determination probability in this manner, if "stick controller operation prompting display" is executed in the super reach, it may be a big hit than "push button operation prompting display" is executed. The nature is high, and it can be enjoyed with expectation about the button effect by the stick controller 122. In addition, there is a possibility that a big hit will be made even when "push button operation promotion display" is executed in the super reach, and it is possible to enjoy the expectation of the button effect by the push button 120 with an expectation.

  It should be noted that “promotion display of push button operation” and “operation promotion display of stick controller” may be determined at a probability other than the probability shown in FIG. 80 (A).

  The operation prompting display includes an operation prompting prompting operation of the push button 120 and an operation prompting prompting operation of the stick controller 122. The operation prompting display of the push button 120 is a mode in which the image of the push button 120 is displayed at the center position of the display screen. That is, the image may be any image that can prompt the player to operate the push button 120. The operation prompting display of the stick controller 122 is an aspect in which the image of the stick controller 122 is displayed at the center position of the display screen. That is, the image may be any image that can prompt the player to operate the stick controller 122.

  Further, an operation valid period display (for example, a horizontally long bar-like indicator display) indicating an operation valid period of the operation unit (the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 at the projecting position) is added to the operation prompting display. The indicator display indicates that the entire horizontal width is filled and that the operation effective period remains for the maximum period. The indicator display is a display indicating that the fill area is sequentially reduced from the right as the operation effective period becomes shorter, and the operation effective period ends when the fill area disappears. By the indicator display, the player can grasp the operation valid period of the operation unit (the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 at the projecting position), and can operate the operation unit within the operation valid period. Although the indicator display for quantitatively displaying the operation valid period is used in this modification, a seven-segment display or the like for numerically displaying the operation valid period may be used, and various displays can be used. Also, the operation valid period display may be displayed for the first time when the operation prompting display is displayed. Further, instead of or in addition to the operation effective period display, audio notification of the operation effective period may be performed. In addition, the display of the operation effective period may not be provided.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78, the effect control CPU 101 executes operation pre-promotion display determination processing for determining the mode of the pre-operation promotion display (notification before operation promotion) displayed before the operation promotion display ( Step S293B). In this operation pre-promotion display determination process, one pre-operation promotion display is determined from among a plurality of types of pre-operation promotion display (for example, common effect, 2 button effects, 4 button effects, and 4V control effects). . The 4V controller effect is the appearance of four stick controller images.

  In addition, the display before operation promotion determined in step S293B is executed in step S8105 of the process during effect symbol variation (FIG. 74).

  Specifically, in the display determination process before operation promotion (step S293B), the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data indicating the display determination random number SR1 (see FIG. 79) before the operation promotion, and the extracted numerical data and FIG. The display pre-promotion display mode is determined using the pre-operation promotion display determination table shown in 80 (B) and (C).

  For example, when the type of the operation promotion display is determined to be, for example, the push button 120 in the operation promotion display determination process (step S293A), the table for determining the display before operation promotion for the push button 120 shown in FIG. To determine the mode of display before operation promotion. As shown in FIG. 80 (B), in the case where the variation pattern is a super reach loss, “display before operation promotion of common effects” is determined with a probability of 60%, and “display before operation promotion of 2 button effects” Is determined with a probability of 30%, and "pre-promotion display of 4 button effects" is determined with a probability of 10%. In addition, when the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the "display before promoting the common effect operation" is determined with a probability of 20%, and the "display before promoting the operation with two buttons effect" is determined with the probability of 30% And “4 button effect display before promotion” is determined with a probability of 50%. It should be noted that “display before operation promotion of common effect”, “display before operation promotion of 2 button effects” and “display before operation promotion of 4 button effects” may be determined with a probability other than the above.

  Further, when the type of the operation promotion display is determined to be, for example, the stick controller 122 in the operation promotion display determination process (step S293A), the table for determining the display before operation promotion in the stick controller 122 shown in FIG. To determine the mode of display before operation promotion. As shown in FIG. 80 (C), in the case where the variation pattern is a super reach loss, “display before operation promotion of common effect” is determined with a probability of 70%, and “display before operation promotion of 4V control effect” Is to be determined with a probability of 30%. In addition, when the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot, “display before operation promotion for common effects” is determined with a probability of 40%, and “display before operation promotion for 4V effects” is determined with a probability of 60% It is supposed to be Note that "display before operation promotion of common effect" and "display before operation promotion of 4V control" may be determined with a probability other than the above.

  In this modification, the random number SR0 for operation promotion display determination and the random number SR1 for display front before display promotion determination shown in FIG. 79 are respectively random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any numerical value in the range of 1 to 100 Although data is extracted, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of the operation promotion display determination random number SR0 and the pre-operation promotion display determination random number SR1 may be appropriately determined. In addition, a random number counter for operation promotion display determination for generating the operation promotion display determination random number SR0 and a random number counter for operation promotion display determination for the operation promotion display determination random number SR1 for generation before the operation promotion display The operation promotion display determination random number counter and the pre-operation promotion display random number counter are updated for each timer interrupt in the random number update process.

  In addition, the display before operation promotion and each start timing of operation promotion display are described in the process table of effects, such as a button.

  Here, the display before the various operation promotion mentioned above is demonstrated. First, "Display before operation promotion of common effect" is a display before operation promotion used in common by both the operation promotion display of the push button 120 and the display of the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122. This is a display in which the type of button or the like can not be identified only by the common effect. In the present modification, “a display before the promotion of the common effect operation” is a common image of an aspect in which the type (push button 120 or stick controller 122) such as a button can not be specified from both left and right sides of the display screen of the effect display device 9. (For example, semi-transparent, indeterminate or unclear button images etc.) appear respectively, both common images move towards the center, and both common images overlap and emit light at the center position of the display screen The display mode is used. In addition, the display before operation promotion of a common effect is not limited to this display mode, The thing of various display modes can be used. For example, a display mode (for example, a display mode called a light collection effect) in which light is concentrated on all or a partial area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 to emit strong light as display before promoting operation of common effects. You may use. Immediately after this focusing effect, an operation prompting display is displayed.

  Next, in the “prompt display for promoting the operation of two buttons and effects”, push button images in a mode in which the push button 120 can be identified appear from both left and right sides of the display screen of the effect display device 9, The display mode is such that the push button image moves toward the center, and when the both push button images overlap at the center position of the display screen, light is emitted. Since it is possible to specify that the player is the push button 120 in the 2 button effect pre-promotion display, it can be expected that the operation push display of the push button 120 will be displayed after this, and the operation prepares for the push button 120 It is possible. In addition, the display before operation promotion of 2 button effect is not limited to this display mode, The thing of various display modes can be used.

  Next, in the “display before promoting operation of 4 button effect”, push button images of an aspect in which the push button 120 can be identified appear from the four corners of the display screen of the effect display device 9, and four push The button image moves toward the center, and at the center position of the display screen, the four push button images overlap and emit light. Even in the pre-promotion display of the four-button effect, since it is possible to specify that the player is the push button 120, it can be expected that the pro-motion display of the push button 120 will be displayed thereafter. It is possible. In addition, the display before operation promotion of 4 button effect is not limited to this display mode, The thing of various display modes can be used.

  Next, “sticker controller image of an aspect that can be identified as the stick controller 122 appears from the four corners of the display screen of the effect display device 9 for“ display before promotion of 4V control effect ”, and four sticks are displayed. The controller image moves toward the center, and the four stick controller images overlap and emit light at the center position of the display screen. Since the player can specify that the player is the stick controller 122 in the pre-promotion display of the 4V-con effect, it can be expected that the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122 will be displayed after this, preparing for the operation of the stick controller 122 It is possible. In addition, the display before operation promotion of 4V-con effect is not limited to this display mode, The thing of various display modes can be used.

  In this modification, the indicator display is added to the display before operation promotion (common effect, 2 button effect, 4 button effect, 4V control effect, etc.), but it may be an aspect without addition. .

  The mode of indicator display may differ depending on the type of operation unit (for example, the stick controller 122 or the push button 120). For example, at least one of the color, shape, size, and the like of the indicator display may be different between the stick controller 122 and the push button 120, or one of the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 may have the indicator display One may not have an indicator display. In this case, the manner of indicator display can be made interesting, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In addition, even if the operation prompting display is the same, the indicator display may or may not be displayed depending on the situation (for example, the type of variation pattern). In addition, there are a plurality of sizes of the operation prompting display (for example, in the case of the push button 120, the large displayed push button 120 (large button) or the small displayed push button 120 (small button), etc.) The presence or absence of the indicator display may be different between the small button and the small button, or the mode of the indicator display may be different. In these cases, the mode of the operation promotion display can be increased, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  As described above, the operation effects such as buttons and the like are roughly divided into two, that is, push button effects and stick controller effects, as shown in FIG. 81. There are a total of five types of push button effects and two types of stick controller effects. As three types of push button effects, there are three types such as the operation promotion display of the push button 120 being displayed after any one of the common effect, the 2 button effect, and the 4 button effect before operation promotion display is displayed. There is a rendition of. Also, as two types of stick controller effects, there are two types of effects such that the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122 is displayed after any one of the common effects and the display before the operation promotion of the 4V con effect is displayed. is there.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs a cut-in effect determination process after the button etc. operation effect determination process (step S293). Using the cut-in effect determination table shown in FIG. 81, one cut-in out of a plurality of types of cut-in effects (for example, cut-in effect A, cut-in effect B and cut-in effect C) having different degrees of expectancy Determine the production. In addition, the degree of expectation for the big hit regarding the cut-in effect is higher for the cut-in effect B than for the cut-in effect A, and higher for the cut-in effect C than for the cut-in effect B.

  In addition, the cut-in effect determined in the cut-in effect determination process is executed in step S8105 of the process during effect pattern variation (FIG. 74).

  For example, in the cut-in effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 81, the effect-promotion display determination process (step S293A) determines the type of the operation promotion display, for example, as the push button 120, and displays before operation promotion If it is determined in the determination process (step S293B) that the display mode before the operation promotion is "common effect" or "two-button effect", the cut-in effect A is determined. Further, for example, when the type of the operation promotion display is determined to be the push button 120 and the mode of display before the operation promotion is determined to be “4 button effect”, it is determined to be the cut-in effect B. Further, the cut-in effect B is also determined when the type of the operation prompting display is determined by, for example, the stick controller 122 and the mode of the display before the operation prompting is determined to be “common effect”. Further, for example, when the type of the operation promotion display is determined by the stick controller 122 and the mode of the display before the operation promotion is determined to be “4V con effect”, the cut-in effect C is determined. As described above, the ratio at which an effect (for example, a cut-in effect C or the like) of a content advantageous to the player is notified differs as the predetermined effect depending on the mode of the display before the operation promotion and the type of the operation promotion display.

  The cut-in effect may be, for example, an effect in which another short scene (for example, a scene in which a character image appears in a predetermined display mode) is inserted into a series of scenes (for example, a battle scene). .

  In the present modification, when the player operates the push button 120 during the operation effective period of the button or the like in the super reach effect, the cut-in effect A is, for example, the specific character image SC (for example, “ It is an effect that a scene of a mode in which a character image of “girl” appears (is appeared) is inserted.

  The cut-in effect B is, for example, a special display mode different from the background NB when there is a button operation (operation of the push button 120 or the stick controller 122) by the player in the operation effective period of the button or the like in the super reach effect. It is an effect that a scene in a mode in which the specific character image SC appears (appears) on the background image SB is inserted.

  When the player operates the stick controller 122 during the operation effective period of the button or the like in the super reach effect, the cut-in effect C is, for example, the special character image SC and the information display image CI on the special background image SB (for example, It is an effect that a scene of an aspect in which a character information display image of "Heat" appears (appears) is inserted. The execution start timing of the cut-in effect display after the button operation is described in the process table of effects such as a button.

  By the way, in the case of the table for determining the cut-in effect of the present modification, when the variation pattern is a super reach loss, the “cut-in effect A” of “common effect + push button” is determined with a probability of 42%, “2 “Cut-in effect A” of button effect + push button is determined with a probability of 21%, “Cut-in effect B” of “4 button effect + push button” is determined with a probability of 7%, “common "Cut in effect B" of "effect + stick controller" is determined with a probability of 21%, and "Cut in effect C" of "4 V con effect + stick controller" is determined with a probability of 9% There is. In addition, when the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the "cut-in effect A" of the "common effect + push button" is determined with a probability of 8%, and the "cut-in of the 2 button effect + push button" The effect "A" is determined with a probability of 12%, the "Cut in effect B" of the "4 button effect + push button" is determined with a probability of 20%, and the "Cut in effect B" of the "common effect + stick controller" Is determined with a probability of 24%, and "Cut-in effect C" of "4V con effect + stick controller" is determined with a probability of 36%.

  Also, even if the display before operation promotion of the common effect is displayed, if the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122 is displayed after that (that is, in the case of “common effect + stick controller”), “common effect” Since the big hit expectation is higher than the “push button”, it can be expected that the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122 can be displayed, and the display before the operation promotion of the common effect can also have a surprising property. , The interest of the game can be improved.

  By setting the determination probability in this manner, when a super reach in the variable display is made, “cut in effect B” and “cut in effect C” are easier to be executed than in the case of super reach loss. It has become. Further, in the case of a super reach loss, "cut-in effect A" is easily performed. That is, the cut-in effect B or the cut-in effect C is more likely to be a big hit than the cut-in effect A.

  In the cut-in effect determination table shown in FIG. 81, although the contents of the cut-in effect are the same for the super reach big hit and the super reach loss, the present invention is not limited to this.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present modification, as shown in FIG. 81, the mode of display before operation promotion (for example, any of common effect, 2 button effects, 4 button effects, or 4V control effects An effect (cut-in) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined effect depending on whether it is a display before the operation promotion) and the type of the operation promotion display (for example, which operation promotion display is the push button 120 or the stick controller 122) Since the ratio at which the effect C and the like are executed is different, the player can be made to pay attention to the type of the display before operation promotion (notification before promotion) and the type of the operation promotion display (promotion notification). This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in this modification, although cut-in production is used as "predetermined production", it is not limited to this. Various effects (for example, effects such as a specific character or the like that appear), effects that the display mode of the background image is changed, other displays performed in response to the operation of the operation unit (push button 120, stick controller 122, etc.) It may be a reach effect of an aspect).

  In addition, since the display before operation promotion and the operation promotion display are executed during super reach effect (during specific effect), the player can be made to pay attention to the type of display before operation promotion and the type of operation promotion display. Can improve the interest of In addition, during the specific effect, in the present variation, it may be during variable display in the pachinko gaming machine 1, not only during the super reach effect, but may be during normal reach effect or non-reach effect. Further, the specific effect may be a button effect at high speed fluctuation, a button effect at reach establishment, a hit or not, a continuous hit button effect, a long press button effect, or the like. Further, during the specific effect, it may be during the effect of a single game in a gaming machine other than the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a slot machine) or in the continuous effect performed over a plurality of games.

  Also, before the display (before execution) of the operation promotion display of the push button 120 (first operation promotion display) and the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122 (second operation promotion display), the display before the operation promotion of the common effect (common Is displayed before promoting the operation of. In other words, when the common operation pre-promotion display is displayed, after the display before this operation promotion display, the operation promotion display of the push button 120 (first operation promotion display) and the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122 (second operation) The player can be made to pay attention to which of the promotion display is displayed, and the enjoyment of the effect of the operation unit (push button 120 or stick controller 122) can be improved.

  In addition, the number of modes of the pre-operation promotion display (pre-promotion notification) that can be executed before the operation promotion display (first promotion notification) of the push button 120 (for example, common effects in FIG. 81, 2 button effects, and 4 button effects And the number of modes (for example, the common effect and 4V con effect in FIG. 81) before the operation promotion display (pre-promotion notification) that can be performed before the operation promotion display (second promotion notification) of the stick controller 122). Since the two types are different, the interest of the game can be improved. The number of modes before the operation promotion display before the operation promotion display of the push button 120 is three, and the number of modes before the operation promotion display before the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122 (notification before promotion) is two. However, it is not limited to these numbers. Also, the number of modes of both may be the same.

  In addition, the number of modes of the pre-operation promotion display (pre-promotion notification) that can be executed before the operation promotion display (first promotion notification) of the push button 120 (for example, common effects in FIG. 81, 2 button effects, and 4 button effects The number of modes (for example, the common effect shown in FIG. 81 and the 4V control effect shown in FIG. 81) that can be executed before the operation promotion display (the second promotion notification) of the stick controller 122 than the three types of Because there are fewer two types of), it is possible to improve the interest of the game. As in the present modification, when the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) is higher when the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122 is performed than when the operation promotion display of the push button 120 is performed, The number of modes before the operation promotion display before the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122 is smaller than the operation promotion display of the push button 120 so that the mode before the operation promotion display before the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122 Therefore, the player can maintain the sense of expectation when the player operates the stick controller 122 (second operation) according to the operation promotion display (second promotion notification) of the stick controller 122.

  In addition, since the push button image is displayed in the 2 button effect or the 4 button effect before operation promotion display, it can be expected that the operation promotion display of the push button 120 will be displayed after this. In addition, since the stick controller image is displayed in the display prior to the operation promotion of the 4V control, it can be expected that the operation promotion display of the stick controller 122 will be displayed thereafter. For this reason, which operation promotion display (promotion notification) is executed, but it is known in advance, so that the player can prepare for the operation (first operation) of the push button 120 or the operation (second operation) of the stick controller 122 It becomes.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, as an operation unit, a push button 120 (first operation unit) and a stick controller 122 (second operation unit), and operation promotion for urging the push button 120 (first operation unit) It is possible to clarify the operation unit to be operated by the player by the display (first operation promotion display) and the operation promotion display (second operation promotion display) for prompting the operation of the stick controller 122 (second operation unit) Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of operating the operation unit accurately.

  In the embodiment described above, the gaming machine (so-called first-class gaming machine) is described which shifts to the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result of the special symbol and the production symbol, but the variable provided in the gaming area A gaming machine (so-called second-type gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit gaming state based on the fact that the gaming ball has won a prize (V prize) in a specific prize opening (V prize opening) in a prize ball device (so-called character) The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which the first type and the second type are combined.

  Further, in this embodiment, transition to the probability change state is possible based on the type of the big hit that occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special winning area is provided with a specific area through which the game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, it shifts to a definite change state, while the big area hits the specific area May be transferred to the normal state when it does not pass. In that case, substantial probability variation big hit and non probability variation big hit may be realized by changing the ease of passage of the game ball to the specific territory with big hit classification. For example, the ease of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening depending on the jackpot type. Specifically, the big hit type long opening time of the big winning opening is a big hit (substantial probability variation big hit) where the game ball is easy to pass to the specific area, and the big opening type short winning type open game is specific It may be a big hit (a substantially non-probable big hit) in which the ball is difficult to pass.

  In the above embodiment, when the variation control is started to notify the microcomputer for effect control 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo sequence 1 Although one variation pattern command is transmitted, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the substrate on which the circuit for controlling the rendering device is mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 etc. and a circuit equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27 etc.) Two substrates with two effect control substrates may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, “the proportions are different” means not only those having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. A: B = 100%: 0% is a concept that includes different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, FIG. 42). (Sound / lamp board) having a function by the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 or the sound output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 or the like and a function by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35 The control command may be transmitted, and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a game machine, but according to the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of game machines are operated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. When the combination of stop symbols turns to a specific symbol combination when the symbol is turned and the symbol is stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player, the predetermined number of medals are applied to the slot machine to be paid out to the player It is also possible. In that case, when a predetermined condition based on the action of the player is established during the effective period, a special part (for example, a big bonus, a regular bonus) accompanied by a transition to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player It is also possible to execute an effect of notifying the degree of expectation for having been determined to the small game with the grant of the value for use, or the replay player with the award of the replay capable of playing the game without using the game value Good. In addition, transition to AT (assist time) to notify the operation mode (pressing order and pressing timing) of the stop switch that can win the winning combination when a predetermined winning combination is won, or winning of replay An effect of informing the degree of expectation for transition to RT (replay time) having a different probability or an effect of suggesting setting of a payout rate of medals may be executed.

  In the above embodiment, although the game machine uses game media as an example, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type game machine that seals game media such as, and gives a score when a prize giving condition is established.

Other Embodiments
Of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, all or part of the configuration may be arbitrarily combined. For example, the following gaming machines can be considered.

A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine),
First operation means (for example, push button 120, trigger button 121, stick controller 122, handle button, cross key for setting, determination key for setting) operable by the player;
A second operation means (for example, an operation unit other than the push button 120 if the first operation means is the push button 120) operable by the player and different from the first operation means;
From the first aspect (for example, an aspect in which a button does not pop out as shown in FIG. 38 (B) or the like) or a second aspect (for example, from the first aspect) Operation prompting display means (for example, effect control microcomputer 100, effect display device 9, FIG. 34 step S8125, and FIG. 35 step S8139 A),
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect when the first operation means or the second operation means is operated based on the operation promotion display being performed by the operation promotion display means (for example, micro for effect control Computer 100 and effect display device 9);
The effect executing means is
When the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the first mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the first mode is regarded as valid determination (for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), FIG. As shown in step S8128 and FIG. 38F, effects of the same effect mode as the first effect mode and the second effect mode of the button serif announcement effect image may be executed, or the character is the same but the movement is different. Even if it performs the production of the same kind of production mode such as the production showing that the character is talking the same meaning contents or the production of the same degree of expectation such as 50% or more of the big hit expectation, etc. It is also possible to perform a related effect such as performing a premium effect for one operation and performing an associated non-premium effect for the other operation).
When the operation prompting display of the first operation means is the second mode, the operation of the second operation means with respect to the second mode is not regarded as an effective determination (for example, for the operation of the second operation means, The same effect as the effect for the operation of the first operation means may not be performed, or any effect may not be performed, as shown in step S8149 of FIG. 35 and FIG. 39 (D). An effect of notifying that the operation is invalid may be performed),
It further comprises a change effect execution means (for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the promotion image 373 to a different size) for executing a change effect for changing the display mode of the operation promotion display,
The change presentation execution means changes the display mode of the operation promotion display when at least one of the first operation means and the second operation means is continuously operated, and a period during which the operation is continuously operated. It is possible to change the operation prompting display to a display mode according to the above.

  According to such a configuration, whether or not to determine the validity differs depending on the operation means operated according to the mode of the operation promotion display. For this reason, the operation according to the operation promotion display can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the operation. Moreover, since the promotion image changes to the display mode according to the period in which the operation is continuously detected, the interest can be improved.

  Specifically, when the display mode of the operation promotion display for prompting the user to continuously hit or hold the push button 120, which is the operation promotion target, is the first mode as shown in FIG. 38B, the push button 120, and Even when any of the other operation units (for example, the stick controller 122, the direction button for selection on the menu screen, and the determination button) is operated, the operation is validated and the operation is continuously performed. In the case, as shown in FIG. 76, the display mode of the operation prompting display may be changed to the display mode according to the continuously operated period.

  In this way, regardless of whether the operation promotion target operation unit is operated or the other operation units are operated, the display mode of the operation promotion display is changed as compared with the case where the display mode is not changed. Can be enhanced, and by changing the operation prompting display, the operation unit to which the operation is to be promoted can be emphasized, so that the operation of the operation unit to which the operation is to be accelerated can be strongly urged.

  When the push button 120 is continuously operated when the operation prompting display is in the first mode, the display mode of the operation prompting display is changed as shown in FIG. When the operation unit is continuously operated, the display mode of the operation prompting display may not be changed.

  In this way, the display mode changes when the operation promoting target operation unit is operated, but the display mode does not change when the other operation units are operated. It is possible to give the player a motivation to change, and to urge the operation of the operation unit to be operated more strongly.

  In addition, in the case where the display mode of the operation promotion display for prompting continuous hitting and long pressing of the push button 120 which is the operation promotion target is the second mode as shown in FIG. 39 (B), the following may be performed. When an operation unit other than the push button 120 (for example, the stick controller 122, a direction button for selection on the menu screen or a determination button) is operated, the operation is not determined to be valid, and the operation is continuously performed. Even if it is done, the display mode of the operation promotion display is not changed. On the other hand, when the push button 120 is continuously operated, the operation is validated, and as shown in FIG. 76, the display mode corresponding to the period in which the operation prompting display mode continues is operated. Let

  In this way, the interest can be improved by changing the display mode as compared with the case where the display mode of the operation promotion display is not changed, and the operation of the operation unit other than the operation unit targeted for the operation promotion Since the display mode of the operation promotion display does not change even if continued, the player can be given motivation to change the display mode of the operation promotion display, and the operation promotion target operation unit is more strongly urged. be able to.

  Note that even when the operation prompting display is in the second mode, when the operation unit other than the push button 120 is operated, the operation is not determined to be valid, but it is continuously operated. As indicated by 76, the display mode of the operation prompting display may be changed continuously to the display mode according to the operated period.

  In this way, the display mode is changed as compared with the case where the display mode of the operation promotion display is not changed, regardless of whether the operation promotion target operation unit is operated or the other operation units are operated. Thus, the interest can be improved, and by changing the display mode of the operation promotion display, the operation unit targeted for the operation promotion can be emphasized, so that the operation of the operation unit targeted for the operation promotion is strongly urged. Can.

  In addition, when the operation unit targeted for operation promotion is operated, the timing of the change of the display mode of the operation promotion display may be made earlier than when the other operation units are operated, or the degree of the change. May be increased.

  In this way, the player can be motivated to operate the operation unit that is the object of operation promotion rather than the operation of the other operation units, so the operation of the operation unit that is the operation promotion target can be more strongly urged it can.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  1 pachinko gaming machine, 8a 1st special symbol display, 8b 2nd special symbol display, 9 effect display devices, 9c, 9d 4th symbol display area, 13 1st start winning opening, 14 2nd starting winning opening, 18c Total storage reserve display unit, 20 special variable winning ball device, 27 speakers, 31 game control board (main board), 56 CPU, 70 voice output board, 560 game control microcomputer, 80 effect control board, 100 effect control micro Computer, 101 CPU for effect control, 109 VDP, 120 push buttons, 122 stick controller, 123 tilt direction sensor unit, 124 push sensor, 200 objects.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
First detection means capable of detecting the action of the player;
Second detecting means capable of detecting the operation of the different player of the operation of pre-Symbol first detecting means detectable player,
Promotion display means capable of displaying, in the first mode or the second mode, a promotion display for urging the player to perform an operation detectable by the first detection means;
And an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect when the first detecting means or the second detecting means detects the action of the player based on the promotion displaying means executing the promotion displaying means. ,
The effect executing means is
When the promotion display of the first detection means is the first aspect, detection that the action of the player is detected by the second detection means with respect to the first aspect is regarded as an effective judgment.
When the promotion display of the first detection means is the second aspect, the fact that the action of the player is detected by the second detection means for the second aspect is not regarded as an effective determination.
It further comprises a change effect execution means for executing a change effect for changing the display mode of the promotion display,
The change presentation execution means can change the promotion display to a display mode according to a period in which the operation is continuously detected by at least one of the first detection means and the second detection means,
The game display device executes the promotion display such that the rate at which the promotion display means is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when executed is higher in the second mode than in the first mode. . The promotion display may be in a difficult-to-see state in which at least a portion is hidden by a movable member effect in which the movable member operates.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display period of the promotion display ends later than a period in which the promotion display is in the difficult-to-view state.

Images